JP2022126876A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine in which a player's interest in a game can be increased.

SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first determination means for executing a first determination on the basis of establishment of a first determination condition; second determination means for executing a second determination on the basis of establishment of a second determination condition which is different from the first determination condition; imparting means for imparting a specific period in which the second determination condition is easily established when a first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to a player when a second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result; display means for dynamically displaying first identification information, on the basis of establishment of the first determination condition; and notification control means for notifying information based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means by the first identification information, when the second determination condition is established in the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are made to be noticed, and the interest of the player is improved.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment, and a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied when the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result. granting means for granting; and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, Display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the establishment of the first judgment condition, and when the second judgment condition is established during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and notification control means for notifying information based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means using the first identification information.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the predetermined period of time has elapsed. It has a first display control means for displaying a part of the first identification information in a specific display mode based on what has been done.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, wherein the predetermined period is is the first period.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition, and the satisfaction of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition, second determination means for executing a second determination; and provision means for providing a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied when the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result. and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the first determination condition is satisfied. display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the establishment; and notification control means for notifying information based on the result of the second determination by the first identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is displayed in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. It has a first display control means for displaying the part. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the second variable winning device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting of the display screen in the third pattern display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbols in the third symbol display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a variation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a small winning scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a small winning scenario a, and (c) is a small winning scenario It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of b typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving / V) It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table, (c) 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within an audio lamp control device; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the V passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound ramp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a small winning opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. 4 is a flowchart showing pseudo-variation display processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a third embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation process 2 normally performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flow chart showing an electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion design performed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion design performed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is the display screen in the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a fourth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within a sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; It is a block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a pseudo fluctuation start setting process at fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding ball number command reception process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-variation setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4] is a front view of the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650. [FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

The inner frame 12 is provided with a large number of nails, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a, a first variable prize winning device 65 having a first specific prize winning port 65a, and a second specific prize winning port 650a. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) provided with the second variable winning device 650 and the like is detachably attached from the front side. A pinball game is performed by causing game balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. It's becoming

An upper tray 17 for storing game balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made uniform, and the pachinko machine 10 includes a "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage" which are not shown. There are three stages of Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-win effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64a, that is, the starting prize hole (starting prize) are in accordance with the themes given to each stage. designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. Sky stage"→"Island stage"→"City stage"→... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the pseudo-variation effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player is arranged to hit the game ball to the front surface of the game board 13, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for pressing down, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable switch for detecting the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by changes in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the player, and the ball is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box" or a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving game balls ejected from the lower tray 50. done. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , rails 61, 62, first ball entry 64a, first variable prize winning device 65 having first specific prize winning port 65a, second variable prize winning device 650 having second specific prize winning port 650a, normal symbol starting port (through A gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). A first ball-entering device 64 having a first ball-entering hole 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning hole 65a, a second variable winning device 650 having a second specific winning hole 650a, and a variable display device unit 80. are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a movable accessory for decoration that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so the range is limited. It is possible to three-dimensionally use the game area provided, and to provide the player with a variety of presentations.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear parts of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front surface of the game board 13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 70 made of resin that connects the rails. This is the area where the game ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball. , the momentum is attenuated and bounced back to the central part side.

The pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing door that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter the first ball entrance 64a and a closed state that prevents game balls from entering the first ball entrance 64a. A first ball-entering device 64 is provided. The opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 has a rectangular outer shape, substantially coincides with the outer circumference of the first ball-entering hole 64a, stands upright in parallel with the game board 13, and faces the first ball-entering hole 64a. By being arranged in such a manner that a game ball does not enter the first ball entrance 64a, it can be configured. The opening/closing door is rotatably supported at its lower end, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 about the axis when a solenoid (not shown) is activated (turned on). ing. As a result, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the upper surface of the opening/closing door, and the received game ball is guided into the first ball inlet 64a. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, and the game ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. Specifically, the opening/closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is always set to be in a closed state. is changed to When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is executed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute an effect based on the lottery result.

In the lottery for the special design performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, it is determined whether the special design wins a big win or a small win, and the special design wins a big win or a small win. When it is determined that the big hit type or the small hit type is also determined.

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbol wins is a big win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state (big win game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed (after the opening period has passed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses).

It is to be noted that, when one game ball wins the first variable prize winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (opening period), or when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period), and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed between the opening operations of the specific door 65f that are repeatedly executed (interval period) are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large amount of game balls (for example, about 150 (10 per round×15 rounds)) are won in the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65, so that a larger amount of prizes than usual is obtained. Balls (about 1500 (100×10 shots)) are paid out.

Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol jackpot, one of the two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" is determined (see FIG. 14 (b)), and the round set as the jackpot type The specific door 65f is opened a number of times (15R (round) in this embodiment). In addition, after the special game state ends, the time-saving game state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, three times if the jackpot A is won during the normal game state) based on the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot. ) is given.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery executed for the passage of the game ball to the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, the normal symbol determination is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening and closing door of the first ball entry device 64 located below the through gate 67 is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment), and the first A game ball can easily enter the ball entrance 64a. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64a, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, a selected variable time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) is reached. After a lapse of time, normal symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. be done. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is executed not only by the second symbol display device 83 but also by the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 . In the present embodiment, when passing through the through gate 67, the number of passages is held up to four times. .

Further, below the through gate 67, a crew member 660 into which game balls passing through the through gate 67 enter is arranged. This croon member is configured in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters. The ball-entering portion is configured such that the distance between the through-gate 67 and the ball-entering portion is less than one game ball so that game balls other than those that have passed through the through-gate 67 do not enter. A spiral flow path 660k is formed to spirally flow down the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion along the inner wall of the croon member 660, and at the end of the spiral flow path 660k, it gently moves toward the center in a mortar shape. A sloped bottom portion 660t is formed. The spiral flow path 660k is configured to guide a game ball entering the ball entry portion to the outer end portion of the bottom portion 660t so that the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom portion 660t. It is The bottom portion 660t has the same shape as the bottom surface of a known krunn, and guides the game ball gradually toward the center portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 660t, a ball outlet 660a slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12 mm) protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 660a, a spiral flow path is formed by a flow path wall protruding 0.5 mm. configured to be discharged to

In the present embodiment, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 pass through the inside of the crew member 660, but not limited to this, game balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 can enter. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the frequency of entering the ball into the crew member 660 is increased, and the ball can be more easily entered into the first ball entrance 64a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 660k is formed inside the croon member 660, but this is not limiting, and the spiral flow path 660k may not be provided, and the croon-shaped bottom surface may be configured only by the spiral channel 660k without forming the . Alternatively, instead of the spiral flow path 660k, a deceleration section may be formed that is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball. As long as it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be selected as appropriate.

As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball portion of the croon member 660 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the croon member 660 in the spiral flow path 660k and is guided to the bottom surface portion 660t. The game ball guided to the bottom portion 660t is gradually guided to the ball outlet 660a while making a circular motion on the bottom portion 660t from the outer peripheral side to the center. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 660a is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. while being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 660a. Therefore, it takes about 10 seconds for a game ball that has entered the entering ball portion of the crew member 660 to be ejected from the ball exit 660a. In the present embodiment, since the variation time for winning a normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 17(a)), when the through gate 67 is passed and the result of the lottery is a winning, At the timing when the variation ends, the entering game ball is discharged from the ball outlet 660a of the crew member 660. It can flow down to the ball entry device 64 . Therefore, even when the player stops shooting the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the opening/closing door is opened. A game nail KG is arranged below the ball outlet 660a at a position facing the ball outlet 660a. As a result, the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 660a and flowed down cannot directly flow down to the first ball-entering device 64, and the falling speed is reduced by the game nail KG, and further distributed to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to further delay the time until the game ball reaches the first ball entry device 64, so that it is possible to match the time lag from the determination of the normal pattern to the opening of the opening/closing door. , the game ball can be more easily entered into the first ball entry port 64a.

In this embodiment, the cloon member 660 is configured to delay the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol, but the timing is not limited to this, and the delay may be 5 seconds or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay, although the period is shorter than the winning fluctuation period.

In the present embodiment, in the case of an outage (in this embodiment, the probability of being out of 4/5), a small hit different from the big hit (in this embodiment, 1/5 of the jackpot) has a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, It is set with a small hit 1/4). When it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the type of the small hit is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific game state (small win game), and the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period (for example, , 1 round until 1.5 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won).

As a result, the ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 4, inside the second variable winning device 650 described above, a V passage 650e3 is provided (see FIG. 4). When the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects that the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) has passed (hereinafter referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is awarded.

Although the details will be described later, when winning a small win of a special symbol, three types of "small win A", "small win B", and "small win C" are referred to the small win type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). Any small hit type is selected from. Then, a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning type. In addition, although the details will be described later, only "small win A" among the three types of small win types is when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 as a result of the small winning game. , it is set to be able to pass through the V passage channel 650e3. That is, only "small win A" is set so that a big win can be given as a result of the small win game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 wins a game (so-called type 1 game) aiming for a big win by lottery of special symbols, wins a small win by lottery of special symbols, and enters the second variable winning device 650 by the small win game. A game (so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine) with a game (so-called 2-type game) aiming for a big hit by passing the winning ball through a specific area (in this embodiment, the V detection switch 650e5). have.

By having such game characteristics, the player can aim for a big win at a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 4(a)-(b). As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and the shooting handle 51 is moved so that the game ball passes through the left side of the third symbol display device 81. When a game is played in the operated game method (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650a (the game ball passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81). As compared with a game method (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) in which the shooting handle 51 is operated. This second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on the front side of the game board and has a front cover body formed with a specific winning hole 650a for receiving game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, and An opening/closing piece 650b configured to be rotatable to open and close the specific winning hole 650a and a flow path arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and through which game balls entering the specific winning hole 650a flow down are formed. It is mainly composed of the flow path member 650h. The second variable prize winning device 650 has a front cover body fixed to the game board 13 with screws so as to cover the through hole machined in the game board 13 by a router from the front side of the game board 13 . The front cover body is provided with a second specific winning opening 650a as an opening into which game balls flowing down the front side of the game board 13 can enter. As shown in FIG. 2, an open/close piece 650b that can be changed to an open state for guiding game balls to the second specific winning hole 650a is attached. As shown in FIG. 2, the opening/closing piece 650b is formed in a claw shape and has a tapered tip, and the other end of the tip is rotatably pivotally supported by the front cover body. there is The side of the opening/closing piece 650b facing the second specific winning opening 650a is recessed in an arc shape so as to guide the game ball to the second specific winning opening 650a when in the open state. The opening/closing piece 650b is configured to be variable between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid arranged in the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. Since the mechanism for varying the opening/closing piece 650b is already known, the details thereof will be omitted.

A part of the through hole is exposed in the lower left part of the front cover body, and is flush with the front surface of the game board 13 by a transparent plastic member so that the back side of the game board 13 can be seen. is blocked by A V passage 650e3 and a V detection switch 650e5, which will be described later, are visible on the back side of this plastic member, and the V detection switch 650e5 (specific area) is arranged at a position corresponding to the V detection switch 650e5. The letter "V" is printed to indicate that the As a result, the player can visually confirm whether or not the game ball entering the second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, thereby further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. can.

4(a) and 4(b) are diagrams showing a channel member 650h arranged on the back side of the game board 13 in the second variable winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 4( a ) is a switching valve 650 b 3 that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball entering the second specific winning port 650 a of the second variable winning device 650 to pass through the V passage 650 . is rotated upward (the solenoid is not activated). In FIG. 4(b), the switching valve 650b3 is moved downward so that the game ball entering the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can pass through the V passage 650e3. It is the figure which showed the state rotated by operating.

A channel member 650h formed on the back side of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). A game ball that has won a second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 rolls in a channel communicating with a through hole of the game board 13 formed inside the front cover body, and the rear side of the game board 13. roll to. The channel member 650h is fixed to the back side of the game board 13 with screws so that the inlet 650a1 of the channel member 650h is arranged at a position facing the through hole. The flow path member 650h forms a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can flow down by the wall portion protruding to the rear side. A flow path is formed so that game balls passing through the inflow port 650a1 are distributed to either the discharge flow path 650e1 or the V passage flow path 650e3. A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at the abutting portion of the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. It is configured to be distributed to the V passage channel 650e3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the discharge flow path 650e1 is an upper flow path in the flow path member 650h. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to protrude to the rear side with a width through which one game ball can pass at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 by a width (15 mm in this embodiment) through which one game ball can pass. It is Below the inner wall portion 650f3, an outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 is arranged with an interval through which one or more game balls can pass. is formed. A partition wall 650f4 is provided to partition the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. The space from the partition wall 650f4 to the inner wall portion 650f3 is configured to be less than one game ball so that the game ball cannot pass above the partition wall 650f4, and the game ball that has flowed down surely flows down to the V passage 650e3. can do. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to gently incline downward to the left to a position just below the inflow port 650a1, and has a width through which one game ball can pass ( In this embodiment, they are formed with an interval of 15 mm). Between the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the end portion of the inner wall portion 650f3, the switching valve 650b3 is arranged so as to have the same upper surface.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 is formed in a plate shape having an upper surface through which one game ball can pass. is rotatably fixed to the This shaft portion is connected to a link member that is operated by a solenoid (not shown). When the solenoid is operated, this link member rotates, and the switching valve 650b3 moves within the range of the arrow shown in FIG. 4(a). is configured to rotate at When the solenoid is not in operation, the switching valve 650b3 is biased and fixed at the solid line position shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 is received by the upper surface and rolled (guided) to the discharge channel 650e1. The game ball flowing down the discharge channel 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6 arranged at the end of the discharge channel 650e1 and guided to the channel where the game ball is discharged to the outside. A passage detection switch 650as having an inflow port 650a1 through which the game ball can pass is provided. It is detected that a game ball has entered the prize winning opening 650a, and based on this detection, payout of prize balls, counting of the number of winning prizes, and the like are executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4(b), when the solenoid is actuated and the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward, when the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 flows downward, the V passage 650e3 Since the entrance to is in an open state, it flows into the V passage channel 650e3. At the end of the V passage channel 650e3, the V detection switch 650e5 described above is arranged, and after being detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game ball is guided to the channel through which it is discharged to the outside.

In addition, in the present embodiment, execution of the small winning game is started when the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is a small winning. The start of the small winning game is a small winning scenario a 202 g 1 or a small winning scenario b 202 g 2 (see FIGS. (a) to (c)) is a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S402 or S403 in FIG. 27) By being set in, it is determined that there is a small winning scenario a202g1 or b202g2 setting ( S1301 of FIG. 36: Yes) is started. The start of the small winning game can be defined as the time when the symbol indicating the small winning is determined and stopped, and the determination period (1 s in this embodiment), which is the period during which the symbol is determined and stopped, has passed.

First, as common to the small winning scenario a 202g1 and the small winning scenario b 202g2, 1.5 seconds after the start of execution of the small winning game, the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward to allow the game ball to pass through the V passage 650e3. is set to After that, 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, the solenoid is deactivated and rotated upward, and the game ball is changed to a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to flow into the V passage 650e3. On the other hand, the operation (opening) timing of the opening/closing piece 650b, which is set so that the game ball can be entered into the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, is determined by the small winning type (that is, the small winning scenario It is variably set depending on whether a202g1 is set or whether it is a small hit type in which a small hit scenario b202g2 is set. Specifically, if the small hit type is a small hit A (small hit type in which the small hit scenario a202g1 is set), as shown in FIG. 16 (b), 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game It is opened and then closed 3 seconds after the start of the small winning game. On the other hand, if the small hit types are small hit B and small hit C (small hit type in which the small hit scenario b202g2 is set), it is released after 4 seconds from the start of the small hit game, and then from the start of the small hit game It will close after 5.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, if the small hit A, the opening and closing piece 650b will be in an open state during the period in which the game ball can flow into the V passage channel 650e3, so that the game ball will flow into the V passage channel 650e3. , the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and a jackpot game can be awarded to the player. On the other hand, in the small hits B and C, as shown in FIG. All the game balls that enter the second specific winning hole 650a without being allowed to flow in are guided to the discharge channel 650e1. That is, the small hit A is a small hit that can detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5, and the small hit B and the small hit C cannot detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. It is set to a possible (difficult) small hit.

In this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 is detected depending on the type of the small hit. It is possible to set the small hits (small hits B and C in this embodiment) that are not made depending on the type of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the probability (frequency) of giving a big hit by adjusting the selection ratio in the small hit type and adjusting the determination probability of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect not only the determination of the big win in the special symbols but also the determination of the small win. As a result, the player's boredom can be further suppressed.

A game ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by a passage detection switch 650as arranged in the inlet 650a1, and a ball that has flowed down the V passage 650e3 is detected by a V detection switch 650e5. A ball flowing down the discharge channel 650e1 is detected by a discharge detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning game balls (the total number of game balls detected by the passage detection switch 650as of the inflow port 650a1) and the total number of discharged game balls (the game detected by the V detection switch 650e5 and the discharge detection switch 650e6) By making it possible to detect the total number of balls), it is possible to monitor whether the winning game balls are discharged within a predetermined time. It becomes possible to easily discover a fraudulent act of intentionally leaving a game ball in the second variable winning device 650.例文帳に追加

The following detection sensors may be provided inside the second variable winning device 650 . For example, a switch that can detect the position of the switching valve 650b3 may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a malfunction of the switching valve 650b3.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. A first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is arranged in the upper right part of the game area in front view (upper right part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is activated when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a.

The first pattern display device 37 indicates by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving or the normal state by the LED, indicates by the lighting state whether it is fluctuating or not, and the stop pattern corresponds to the jackpot. The lighting state indicates whether the winning pattern, the pattern corresponding to the small win, or the missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state. The segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs. is configured to

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display of normal symbols (second symbols) is executed in the second symbol display device 83 using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol (in this embodiment, for example, "○×" displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 shown in FIG. The variable display of the general pattern auxiliary pattern) is executed.

In addition, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, which triggers the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, is a hit of the normal symbol, so that the first ball entering device 64 is opened. configured only when That is, in the present embodiment, after passing through the through gate 67, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and the first ball entering device 64 is opened (normal symbol winning game period) after it stops at the winning symbol. During this time, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64a. Triggered by the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol). Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol, a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (in this embodiment, special symbol display shown in FIG. 5A) area Ds2, etc.) is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fused design that combines the variation of the normal design and the special design is variably displayed in the main design display area Dm of the third design display device 81 (see FIG. 5(a)). As shown in FIG. 5(a), the main symbol display area Dm is composed of a display area larger than the normal symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2, and the player mainly visually recognizes the fusion symbol. It is configured to execute a game by As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbols are hit, and the special symbols do not start to change until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. Although the start opening of the special pattern is lower than that of the game machine configured so that the ball can be entered at all times, the change of the fusion pattern is started when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player becomes bored and gets bored with the game early. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 has not only the fusion symbol, but also dedicated symbols corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol (ordinary symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1, special symbol display area Ds2 Since the special symbol auxiliary symbols to be displayed are also displayed, the variation state of the normal symbols and the variation state of the special symbols can be individually identified, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player. Details of the fusion pattern will be described later.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. A row (fusion pattern) is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(a), below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, there is set a normal figure reserved number display area Ds3. When the right to pass through the through gate 67 and start the fluctuation of the normal pattern is reserved and stored in this normal pattern reserved number display area Ds3, the reserved pattern indicating the reserved number is shown in FIG. This is an area to be displayed with "black circle pattern". It is configured to display one "black circle pattern" for one reserved number.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. FIG. The fusion symbols displayed in the main symbol display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is configured by adding numbers from "0" to "9" inside a decorated quadrangular decorative frame. Further, a left blinking display portion DF1, a middle blinking display portion DF2, and a right blinking display portion DF3 are formed at the lower end portion of the symbols in each symbol row. The right flashing display part DF3 of the right symbol row is configured to flash correspondingly to the winning variation display of the normal symbols. In this case, the middle blinking display part DF2 of the middle symbol row has a decorative function of blinking corresponding to the variation of the middle symbol row. On the other hand, the left blinking display portion DF1 of the left symbol row, the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row, and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the right symbol row are configured to blink correspondingly to the deviation display of the normal symbol. ing.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol in the fusion symbol while suppressing the sense of incongruity. Therefore, the player can easily play the game by visually recognizing the fusion pattern, and can simplify the complicated game property and notify the player.

FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved normal symbols is 2, normal symbols and special symbols are out of fluctuation and stopped at symbols, and fusion symbols are also stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol is out of line, the symbol "○×" is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 5(b). On the other hand, when the normal symbol wins, the "OO" symbol (see FIG. 6(b)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fusion pattern, when it is out of the normal pattern, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 are stopped and displayed in a state where they are maintained in the extinguished state (see FIG. 5(b)). .

FIG. 6(a) shows an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when one normal symbol reserved ball number is digested from the state of FIG. 5(b) described above and the variation of the normal symbol starts. It is a diagram. When the variation of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol auxiliary symbol in the normal symbol display area Ds1 is variably displayed. This general pattern auxiliary pattern is composed of a pattern row composed of "O" patterns and "X" patterns, and this pattern row is displayed in two rows in the normal pattern display area Ds1. When the variable display is started, the "O" symbols and the "X" symbols are repeatedly displayed variable at high speed. In addition, when the "○" symbols are displayed in the respective symbol rows, the normal symbols are displayed to indicate the win.

Synchronously with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, each symbol row of the fused symbols in the main symbol display area Dm also starts scroll display and is variably displayed. When the scrolling display of each symbol row is started, the blinking display portions DF1 to DF3 of each fusion symbol also start blinking.

FIG. 6(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6(a) described above and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a diagram showing about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, "○" symbols indicating the winning of the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. The fused symbols are displayed in a ready-to-win display mode in which "7" symbols are displayed in the left and right symbol rows and the middle symbol row is scrolled. Further, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the ready-to-win symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed while maintaining the lighted state. Note that the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row is displayed in a blinking state.

Thus, in this embodiment, the fusion symbol also starts to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol. Furthermore, if the result of determination of whether or not the normal symbol is successful is matched with the passage of the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the normal symbol, the fusion symbol is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode. In this case, the left symbol row stops changing first, the left blinking display part DF1 is lit, and after a predetermined period (in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol), the right blinking display part DF3 stops displaying. (stop display with reach symbol), and the right flashing display portion DF3 is displayed in a lighting state. In this way, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 start variable display in synchronism with the variation of the normal symbols, and the right blinking display portion DF3 is displayed in accordance with the lapse of the variable display time of the normal symbols. It is configured so that the blinking display ends. As a result, the player can determine the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by paying attention to the right flashing display portion DF3.

In addition, when the judgment result of the normal symbol is out, the fusion symbol is configured so that all the symbol rows are stop-displayed with non-reach out symbols in accordance with the lapse of the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol. ing. In this case, the left symbol row is stopped first, then the right symbol row, and finally the middle symbol row is stop-displayed in accordance with the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol. In this case, each blinking display portion is also displayed after the blinking display ends in a light-off state based on the timing when the pattern row stops.

In FIG. 7(a), the normal symbols described above with reference to FIG. 6(b) are stopped and displayed as symbols indicating winning, and the electric accessory (opening/closing door) of the first ball entry device 64 is operated to open and close. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol winning game period in which the door is in an open state is reached. When the winning game of the normal pattern is started, the fused pattern displays characters ``Put the game ball into the small attacker and enter the super reach'' while maintaining the ready-to-win display mode, and the first ball-entering device is displayed to the player. A notification mode is displayed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a of 64. FIG. In this case, the fusion symbols are displayed in the ready-to-win display mode, and the state in which the middle symbol row is scrolled at a low speed is maintained. In addition, in the present embodiment, according to the timing when the normal symbol wins, the notification is displayed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a. In this case, the notification may be made from a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 5 seconds before). Furthermore, an entrance ball opening for presentation (general winning opening (one ball is paid out to the player when winning a prize)) is arranged, and the player wins the entrance ball opening, whereby the third symbol display device is displayed. It may be configured such that the effect of the fusion pattern displayed at 81 is variable. By doing so, the player can easily play the game by shooting the game ball even during the fluctuation period of the normal symbols. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be entered.

Furthermore, by setting a long opening period (for example, 10 seconds) until the first ball entrance 64a is opened after the winning of the normal symbol, the opening period can be used to perform the first entrance. The game may be configured to make it easier for the player to enter the first ball entrance 64a by performing an effect for the player to shoot the game ball toward the ball entrance 64a. Furthermore, in the normal symbol winning game, the first ball entrance 64a is configured to be opened multiple times, and the first three times are short-term (for example, 0.5 seconds open for an interval period (first ball entry) The period during which the port 64a is closed) is opened for 0.5 seconds), after which the interval period (the period during which the first ball entrance 64a is closed) is set for 5 seconds, and then the first ball is entered. It may be configured to open the mouth 64a for one second. By doing so, the period until the fourth long-term opening is used to indicate that it is the period in which the first ball entrance 64a is opened, and the operation of opening the first ball entrance 64a is added. can be directed. Therefore, the opportunity for the player to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner, and the problem of missing the opportunity to enter the ball can be suppressed.

FIG. 7(b) shows the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the normal symbol winning game and the special symbol variation is started, as described above with reference to FIG. 7(a). It is the figure which showed about the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81. FIG. Dynamic display of the special symbol auxiliary pattern displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is started at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the special symbol starts to change. As shown in FIG. 7(b), the special figure auxiliary pattern is constructed by arranging a pattern row composed of a "○" pattern and an "x" pattern on the left and right sides. Winning of the special pattern is notified by stop display of ``○'' patterns aligned to the left and right, and misregistration is notified by displaying a combination of ``◯'' and ``x'' patterns. In addition, when it is a small hit, it is notified by stop-displaying "x" symbols aligned to the left and right. Also, when the special symbols are variably displayed, each symbol row is variably displayed by switching between the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol at high speed.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), in synchronism with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the fusion symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area while maintaining the ready-to-win display mode, and the main symbols are displayed. A super ready-to-win display mode effect is displayed in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm. FIG. 7(b) shows an example of a display mode of Super Reach, in which a monster and a hero are displayed facing each other, and the words "If the hero wins, you win big!" are displayed. Here, in the example of the display mode of super ready-to-win shown, by displaying the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins, it is reported that the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big win.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 1/40 in the normal game state (other than the time-saving game state). Therefore, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a at a rate of one time after the normal symbol variation is started 40 times. On the other hand, the winning probability of the special symbols is set at 1/5, and the winning probability is set high in advance. Therefore, the start of the special symbol variation itself is a chance that the probability of winning is 1/5, and all the special symbol variations are displayed in a super reach display mode with high expectations for winning. configured to be

FIG. 8(a) shows the third symbol when the variation of the special symbol is started and the success/failure determination result is out, and when the variation time of the special symbol ends, as described above with reference to FIG. 7(b). 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a display device 81; FIG. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbols has passed, the variation of the special symbol auxiliary symbols displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped by the combination of the ``O'' symbol and the ``X'' symbol indicating the deviation. In addition, the fused symbol is also stop-displayed with a symbol different from the ready-to-win symbol ("6" symbol in this embodiment) in accordance with the timing when the special symbol is stopped, and the middle blinking display part DF2 is also displayed while maintaining the lighting state. . Furthermore, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the judgment result is wrong by displaying the characters "Sorry!!". In addition, before the display mode shown in FIG. 8A is displayed, in the case of the example of Super Reach shown in FIG. The fusion symbol that has been displayed is enlarged and displayed in the main symbol display area Dm.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the normal symbols and the special symbols are variably displayed, respectively, but the fused symbols fuse the variations of the normal symbols and the special symbols as 1 variation and display them variably to inform the player. do. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol wins and the special symbol variation does not start unless the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the normal symbol winning game. Since the fluctuation of the fusion pattern is started based on this, the game can be enjoyed with the production of the fusion pattern even during the period when the fluctuation of the special pattern is not started. Further, since the hit of the normal pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode of the fusion pattern, there is no need for the player to separate and recognize the normal pattern and the special pattern, and the expectation of the special pattern hit is high. It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in a state where it has become. Furthermore, during the normal pattern winning game, the player is notified to enter the game ball into the first ball entering device 64 (corresponding to the small attacker in terms of production), so that the fusion pattern reaches. By adopting the display mode, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player stops shooting the game ball and misses the opportunity to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a.

Also, although not shown in the figure, if the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, in the case of the example of super reach shown in FIG. , The reduced fusion pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner. After that, the special figure auxiliary symbols are stopped and displayed together with "○" symbols, and as for the fusion symbols, the same symbols as the ready-to-win symbols are stopped in the middle symbol row, and it is notified that the success/failure determination result was a hit (jackpot). be done.

In the present embodiment, the flashing display portion corresponding to the hit and miss of the normal symbol is configured to be variable, but not limited to this, the flashing display portion that blinks corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is all flashing display portions. As, all flashing based on the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, in a mode corresponding to the result of judgment at the fluctuation stop timing (for example, if it is hit, it is all lit, if it is off, it is all extinguished) It may be configured so as to display the confirmation. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the blinking display portion is a part of the pattern, but the background of the entire pattern may be the blinking display portion. (For example, in the case of a cat character, only the bell portion of the cat) may be used as the flashing display portion. By constructing in this way, the flashing display part becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the player can play the game while recognizing the fused pattern as a pattern for notifying one lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern). Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as for the display corresponding to the change of the normal pattern in the fusion pattern, it is possible to display the change of the normal pattern not only by blinking but also by adding an effect to the pattern and displaying it so that the effect moves. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by shaking a part of the pattern. Furthermore, it may be constructed such that the general pattern auxiliary pattern is displayed by replacing it with a flashing display portion or the effect of the fusion pattern. By constructing in this way, the area where the general pattern auxiliary pattern is displayed can be used for the production of other games, and the display area can be effectively used.

Next, referring to FIG. 8(b) and FIGS. 10(a) to (b), the pseudo variation of the fused symbols will be described. In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the fusion symbol in order to show the player the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation. However, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the fusion symbols maintain the ready-to-win display mode correspondingly, and are stopped and displayed at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing. In this case, when a new game ball passes through the through gate 67 or when a held ball of the normal pattern is stored, the normal pattern is newly changed even during the special pattern change. be started. Therefore, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, there is a case where the variation of the normal symbol is in progress, and the fusion symbol cannot be varied at the variation start timing of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation of the normal symbols is newly started during the variation of the special symbols, and when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the variation of the fusion symbols is stopped. In order to match the timing and the fluctuation start timing of the normal design, after the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, it is configured to execute the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion design.

With reference to FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the flow of pseudo variation of fusion symbols will be described. FIG. 10(a) shows the third symbol display when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, and two reserved balls of which the lottery result is lost are continuously stored in the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the device 81.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), first, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed with the passing of a game ball through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variable normal symbol. is started (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, a selected variation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) elapses and the general pattern variation period ends, the winning pattern of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 6 (b) is displayed.). Then, the opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 is opened, and the third pattern display device 81 informs the player to enter the game ball into the first ball-entering port 64a of the first ball-entering device 64. is displayed (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7A is displayed).

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is performed, and if the special symbol lottery result is out, a pseudo variation is set when the special symbol variation display is set. Determine whether or not to set (determination timing). Although the details will be described later in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reservations of the normal design, and when it is determined that there is a hit within the 2 reservations of the normal design, a pseudo-variation is set. (sets the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON). In other words, as shown in FIG. 10(a), if all the normal symbols are not held in 2, the pseudo variation is not set at this point.

By configuring in this way, the lottery result in the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out, but when the fluctuation that becomes a hit in the fluctuation within 2 reservations is started, it continues with pseudo fluctuation until the fluctuation By continuing the variation of the fused pattern, it is possible to use the period to give various effects to the player. Furthermore, even if the variation is out of line, it is possible to make the player have expectations. In addition, the frequency of stopping due to the result of the winning lottery can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency (probability) of winning is high, and the player can continue playing the game.

Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 starts to change the special symbols (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7(b) is displayed), and five seconds before the special symbols stop changing, the pseudo-variation is started. Determine again whether to set or not. Details will be described later in the pseudo-variation setting process of FIG. 45, but first, it is determined whether or not pseudo-variation has already been set (the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON).

If the pseudo fluctuation is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reserves of the normal symbols, and if it is determined that there is a hit within the 2 reserves, the pseudo fluctuation is set (the pseudo setting flag 223h on). On the other hand, if there is no hit within the two holdings of the normal symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols to be started next, it is the execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the variable display of the special symbols is executed. It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is an execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the special symbol variation display is executed, a pseudo variation is set.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10(a), if there is no winning within the two reserves of the normal symbols, but it is the execution period during which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the special symbol variation display is executed. , to set the pseudo-variation. At this time, in order to match the end timing of the pseudo-variation to be set with the variation of the normal symbol being executed, the period from the end of the variation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the variation of the normal symbol (difference time t1 ) is set as the pseudo fluctuation period.

Here, when the fluctuation of the fusion design is stopped based on the passage of the fluctuation period of the special design, the fluctuation of the normal design is in progress, and the fluctuation of the fusion design is not started until a new fluctuation opportunity of the normal design. , the reserved pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, but the next lottery game is not started, so that the player gets bored or feels uneasy about the fact that the game will not be played. can be considered. However, in this embodiment, it is determined 5 seconds before the stop of the fluctuation that the fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed during the period when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is performed during the period until the end of the period. is set, the player can comfortably play the game by starting the variation of the next fusion pattern at a good tempo with the stop of the fusion pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation five seconds before the end timing of the special symbol. good. By constructing in this way, when passing through the through gate 67 after 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop of the special design and the fluctuation of the normal design is started, the fluctuation of the fusion design is started until the fluctuation of the normal design is stopped. It is possible to prevent undesired defects. Further, it may be configured such that the control load can be reduced by making a decision based on both the pre-timing such as 5 seconds before and the stop timing to increase the chances of setting the pseudo fluctuation in advance.

FIG. 10(b) shows the third symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, and two reserved balls of which the lottery result is lost and hit are stored in order among the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed on the display device 81.

As in FIG. 10(a), the result of the lottery of normal symbols is a win, the opening/closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and a special symbol is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a. If the result of the lottery is lost, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation when the variable display of the special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the winning hold is already stored in the two holds of the normal design, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special design, the pseudo fluctuation of maximum 30 seconds ends the fluctuation of the special design. is set from Here, the reason for the pseudo fluctuation of maximum 30 seconds is that the fluctuation time of the normal design is 10 seconds in case of winning and 10 seconds at maximum in case of losing. Therefore, even if 10 seconds, which is the longest variation of the variation of the normal pattern and the variation of the 2 hold, is selected, the pseudo variation is continuously executed until the variation of the normal pattern of the 2 hold is completed. be done. Therefore, the pseudo-variation ends earlier than the variation corresponding to the holding of the winning normal symbol, and there is a gap before the first ball entrance 64a is opened, which makes the game awkward. can be suppressed. In addition, the set pseudo-variation of maximum 30 seconds is compulsory when the fluctuation of the winning normal pattern ends, the first ball entrance 64a opens, the game ball enters and the special pattern starts to fluctuate. terminates properly. After that, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (in this embodiment, from the production of whether or not to change again shown in FIG. 8(b), the middle symbol row shown in FIG. 7(a) changes again. Display switched to production) is executed.

As a result, when the winning variation of the normal symbols has already been determined at the start of the variation of the special symbols (retained within 2 retention), the re-variation rendering is performed without displaying the losing performance. By executing it, the winning normal patterns are changed, and a performance can be performed as to whether or not the special patterns are changed again, and the frequency of the losing performance is reduced so that the player feels regrettable. You can reduce the number of times you In addition, in this embodiment, even though the variation of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is pseudo-variation, the variation of the special symbol is 30 because the game ball could not be entered into the first ball entrance 64a. If it is not started even after the pseudo-variation period of seconds has elapsed, the variation is terminated without starting the re-variation with the pseudo-variation effect shown in FIG. 8(b).

On the other hand, at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the number of reserved normal symbols is less than 2, and if the winning reservation is not stored in the 2 reservations, the pseudo fluctuation is set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. configured to prevent In that case, as shown in FIG. 10(b), five seconds before the end of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, it is determined whether there is a hit in the currently stored two holdings of the normal symbols, and stored. In this case, a maximum of 30 seconds of pseudo fluctuation is set as in the case stored at the start of fluctuation. Further, it may be determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation during the period for determining the symbol (in this embodiment, 1s).

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-variation at the start of the special symbol variation and 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation. It may be at the end or only at the end of fluctuation. Furthermore, only at the start of fluctuation, it may be configured to determine each time the normal pattern hold is established, or may be determined for a predetermined period (for example, every 100 ms), or by appropriately combining the above conditions good too.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8(b), display contents of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In FIG. 8(b), when it is determined to set the pseudo variation at the timing of determining the pseudo variation described above with reference to FIGS. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed by 81. FIG. As described above, during the fluctuation of the special design, the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, when the fluctuation of the normal design is in progress, the fluctuation start timing of the special design and the fluctuation of the normal design In order to match the start timing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and after the out-of-special symbol (for example, FIG. 8(a)) is displayed, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the fused symbol is executed. there is

As shown in FIG. 8(b), since the normal symbols are fluctuating, the normal symbols are variably displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1. Then, a mode is displayed in which the fused symbols show signs of re-fluctuation, such as vibration of the middle symbol row of the fused symbols in the main symbol display area Dm. With regard to the possibility that the special symbols may change again by repeatedly hitting , it is suggested that pressing the frame button 22 should be accompanied by the words "Chance to change again with repeated button presses!" By displaying the mode shown, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner by performing a trembling effect in accordance with the frame button 22.例文帳に追加In this way, by performing the pseudo-variation, it is possible to match the variation start timing of the special symbols with the variation start timing of the normal symbols, and to show the variation of the normal symbols and the special symbols as one variation to the player. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets bored with the game early by giving the player an expectation for the re-variation of the special symbols. In addition, in the re-variation effect, if a hit hold is stored in 2 holds, if pseudo-variation is set, the probability that the effect sound will be changed when the frame button 22 is pressed is set high. , the trembling size of the middle pattern becomes large with a high probability, a special pattern is displayed, or a special lamp lighting mode is executed. In such a case, by configuring so that the same effect is executed with a low probability even when the winning suspension is not stored, the player expects that the re-fluctuation will be started. You can play games. Furthermore, in order to suppress the problem that the game ball is not shot at the timing when the first ball entrance 64a is opened when the pseudo-variation is executed, the game ball is notified to be shot. By firing, the middle pattern row is configured to tremble, or the through gate 67 is notified to pass the game ball, and the state in which the game ball enters the crew member 660 is notified to be maintained. It is even better to have a configuration that

FIG. 9(a) is an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the variation time of the normal symbols has passed from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, "O" and "X" symbols indicating deviation from the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the fused symbols, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed with "7" symbols and "5" symbols separated from each other. In addition, blinking display areas DF1 and DF3 are also displayed in a lit state and a non-lighted state, indicating deviation from the normal pattern. The medium symbol row is displayed with the flashing display area Df2 turned off, and it is notified that the special symbol has not changed.

FIG. 9(b) shows that when the variation of the special symbol is started and the success/failure determination result is a small hit as described above with reference to FIG. 7(b), when the variation time of the special symbol ends 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a pattern display device 81; FIG. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbols has passed, the variation of the special symbols displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stop-displayed in a state in which the "x" symbols indicating the small win are aligned. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in synchronism with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the fusion symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbols are displayed. A super ready-to-win display mode effect is displayed in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm. FIG. 9(b) shows an example of a display mode of Super Reach, in which a monster and a hero are displayed facing each other, and the words "If the hero wins, you win big!!" are displayed. Here, in the example of the super reach display mode shown here, by displaying the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins, it is reported that the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big win. Here, in the case of a small winning variation, a pattern simulating the second variable winning device 650 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the end of the variation period, and the game ball enters the second specific winning port 650a. A notification is executed to prompt the game ball to roll. Here, when the player enters the game ball into the second specific winning hole 650a and is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed in which the hero performs a special move to defeat the monster. be. When the game ball is not entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, or when it is not detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game is blacked out as it is, and the next variation is executed. In the present embodiment, a blackout effect is used, but it is configured to display an effect in which the hero loses to the monster by the ending effect of the small winning game, and the result of the small winning game is displayed to the player. can be configured to

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. Cover side and cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator (not shown) for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. It is transmitted in only one direction from the controller 110 to the sub-controllers. On the other hand, data can be transmitted and received bi-directionally to the payout control device 111 .

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, and sensors (magnet sensors, radio wave sensors) for detecting game balls and fraudulent games. Switch 208, opening and closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, switching valve solenoid 650c2 for driving the switching valve 650b3 in the second variable winning device 650 Various solenoids consisting of 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Also, the input/output port 205 is connected to a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 , and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasure signals output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253 . Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out prize balls one by one. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). Thus, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out continuously, such as during a big win, the payout motor 216 continues to pay out prize balls without a break, and the heat generation of the payout motor 216 is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down due to the melting of the resin portion or the elastic portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216 . In addition, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable parts of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the lower tray unit 15 operation and the parts touched by the player such as the handle 51), causing injury such as burns to the player. It can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of payouts until the payout motor 216 suspends the payout of prize balls and the pause period of payout are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 . Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter CS3 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, in the lottery of normal symbols, the second random number counter C4, the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 used for fluctuation pattern selection is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 33). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203e of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a consisting of one execution area.In this area, a first hit random number counter C1, Each value of the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type counter CS3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the pattern starting port (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 33).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the execution area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is stored in the sphere execution area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are 80 random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols. It is In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big hit is 80, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/5".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)). As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot A". Become. Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

In addition, in this embodiment, as a kind of special symbol loss (other than the big win), a small win is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state. In the first winning random number counter C1, there are 100 random numbers that are small winnings of special symbols. stored. Among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of small winning random numbers is 100, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "1/4".

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter CS3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 are provided in the ROM 202 The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). In addition, the content of the small hit game according to each small hit classification is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop symbol of the fusion symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the stop type selection counter C3. A value of the stop type selection counter C3 is assigned to each of the symbols "0" to "9". In addition, when the same symbol as the ready-to-win pattern is selected, the determined symbol plus 1 is determined (for example, when the same "9" symbol as the ready-to-reach symbol is determined, " 0" symbol is determined).

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation type of the super ready-to-win as the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern of the fusion symbol). The variation pattern selection table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores a variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big win, a variation pattern selection table 202e2 for loss, and a variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small win. Each selection table stores a plurality of super reach variation pattern types. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each super reach type of each selection table, and the variation type obtained from the selection table corresponding to the success judgment result (either hit, miss, or small hit) The type of super reach is determined based on the value of the counter CS1. A variable time is set for each super reach type, and the variable time and the type of super reach are notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a variable pattern command. In the audio ramp control device 113, more detailed super reach details are determined based on the notified variation pattern command and the value of the effect counter 223g that has been acquired. As a result, main controller 110 performs rough selection and audio lamp controller 113 performs more detailed selection, thereby reducing the control load on main controller 110 . In the present embodiment, the variation time of the super reach determined by the main controller 110 is the same for each super reach. You may Further, the audio ramp control device 113 may be configured to determine the variation time.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and the ball has passed through either the central or right normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set by the second winning random number table. If it matches the set random number value, it is determined as a normal symbol win.

There are 6 random numbers that are normal symbol hits in the normal game state, and the range is "0 to 5". These random numbers are normally stored in the random number table per symbol 202d (see FIG. 14(c)). In this way, the total number of random numbers for the normal design is 240, and the total number of random numbers for winning the normal design is 6, so the probability of winning the normal design is "1/40".

On the other hand, there are 240 random numbers that are normal symbols in the time-saving game state, and the range is "0 to 239". These random numbers are normally stored in the random number table per symbol 202d (see FIG. 14(c)). In this way, the total number of random numbers in the normal pattern is 240, and the total number of random numbers in the normal pattern is 240, so the probability of winning the normal pattern is "1/1". It's a hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the normal game state, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variation display is displayed on the normal symbol variation type counter. It is executed for a period (5 to 10 seconds) according to the value of CS2. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined as winning, and after the variable display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is illuminated and displayed. , the first ball entrance 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state, the first ball entrance 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is won. It can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the normal symbols always win, and the time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed is set to 3 seconds. Further, the opening pattern is set so that the first ball entrance 64a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol wins. In this way, in the time-saving game state, it is configured such that the game ball is easier to enter the first ball entrance 64a than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 33).

With this configuration, during the time-saving game, the variation of the special symbols is likely to be executed, and the possibility of winning a small hit or a big hit increases. Therefore, the possibility that the player will win a big win becomes higher than in the normal game state, and the player can be continuously given a big win during the time-saving game. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the time-saving game will be executed, and the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, in the time saving game state, the small winning type selection table 202c becomes a table dedicated to the time saving game, and in the table, by setting the ratio of selecting the small winning A high, the small winning game is executed during the time saving. When the game ball is detected easily by the V detection switch 650e5, it is possible to increase the probability that the big hit game is executed during the time saving.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 sets the special symbol lottery and variation pattern and the normal symbol lottery and variation pattern setting according to the value of the counter and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a first jackpot type selection table 202b, a small hit type selection table 202c, a second random number table 202d, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, a small win scenario table 202g, and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h are provided.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a is a table in which the values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Incidentally, in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the random number that becomes the small winning of the special symbol is also set. The detailed content of the first hit random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(b).

The small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter CS3 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. In addition, the detailed content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. When the random number specified in the second winning random number table 202d and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 match, it is determined as a normal symbol jackpot. Details of the second winning random number table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(c). In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the normal game state, after the variable display for a predetermined time (10 seconds) ends, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a The electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the win is always normal symbols, the variation time is set to 3 seconds, and after the variation display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a. The electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with is opened "2 seconds x 2 times".

In addition, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, may be changed between the normal game state and the time saving game state (during time saving).

The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a big hit variation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the success determination result is a big hit, and the success/failure determination result If it is out and it is a normal game state, the variation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown) for exclusive use and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) for exclusive use when the success judgment result is a small hit Each is configured at least.

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. It is Although not shown, the jackpot scenario table 202f consists of a jackpot scenario a 202f1 dedicated to the jackpot type of jackpot A and a jackpot scenario b 202f2 dedicated to the jackpot type of jackpot B.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario content) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (see FIG. 13(b)) that counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening/closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small winning scenario table 202g rotates the opening and closing piece 650b rightward so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a that opens the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. It is a data table used to determine the opening scenario to operate and the operation scenario to operate the switching valve 650b3, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small winning type are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(a), the small hit scenario table 202g includes a small hit scenario a202g1 (see FIG. 16(b)) for exclusive use when the small hit type is the small hit A, and the small hit type is a small win B or C, and a small win scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16(c)).

In this small winning scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h (see FIG. 13(b)) which counts when the small winning scenario is set. , the opening/closing control of the opening/closing piece 650b is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the switching valve 650b3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. In addition, in the process of determining whether or not the passage of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a and the V passage 650e3 is normal, the range in which the ball is allowed to pass is also based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h. stipulated.

The normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h is a data table used for determining the display mode of the normal pattern variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2. In this normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of normal patterns are defined. Specifically, the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202h is a general pattern variation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) dedicated to the normal gaming state, and a normal general pattern selection table dedicated to the time saving gaming state. It is configured at least by the figure fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving) (see FIG. 17(b)).

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). FIG. 13(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a time saving medium counter 203d, and a counter buffer 203e. , a V flag 203f, a big win scenario counter 203g, a small win scenario counter 203h, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entrance 64a, and has one execution area. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data are stored in the execution area. be.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 and the value of the counter C4 is acquired in accordance with the passage through the through gate, the winning information command including those values is output by voice lamp. It is sent to the control device 113 . When the general pattern winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the counter C4 from the general pattern winning information command and stores them in the RAM 223 as general pattern winning information. Stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases. 1 is added to (see S604 in FIG. 29), and 1 is subtracted (see S505 in FIG. 28) each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times M of variable display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S606 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 29: No).

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S506 in FIG. 28 and S605 in FIG. 29). The pending ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the variable display reserved balls reserved by the main controller 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the normal symbol pending ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving counter 203d is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203d is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (normal game state) with normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving medium counter 203d is set to zero, and in the main controller 110, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, in the normal game state, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", 3 is set, and if it is "jackpot B", 0 is set. ', 9 is set, and 'jackpot B' is set to 3. After that, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect ends until the value of the time saving counter 203d becomes 0 (S213 in FIG. 25).

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is referred to. Then, if the value is 1 or more, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for high probability) in the time saving game state (S510 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. (S518 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds×2 times is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a (S519 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for low probability) in the normal game state (S511 in FIG. 28), and furthermore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is obtained. is set to 10 seconds (S520 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds×1 time is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) attached to the first entrance 64a (S521 in FIG. 28). ).

The counter buffer 203e is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The V flag 203f is a flag for storing detection of the ball passing through the V passage 650e3, which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and the value of the V flag 203f at the end of the small win. Based on this, a jackpot is awarded. This V flag 203f is set to indicate the type of the jackpot based on the type of the jackpot in the V passing time process (S705 in FIG. 30), and is referred to in the small hit ending control process (S1405 in FIG. 37), and then It is set to off (S1406 in FIG. 37).

In this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which various counter values are added by timer interrupt processing. It may be measured using a period of time.

The jackpot scenario counter 203g is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening/closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined. Opening control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203g is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot control processing (S1102 in FIG. 34), and in the jackpot ending control processing, when the control based on the jackpot scenario ends, the jackpot scenario counter 203g is cleared (S1205 in FIG. 35).

The small winning scenario counter 203h is a counter for updating the small winning scenario in which the operation timing of various devices (the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable prize winning device 650 and the switching valve 650b3) is defined. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small winning based on the small winning scenario updated by the counter 203h. This small winning scenario counter 203h is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a small winning scenario is set in the small winning control process (S1302 in FIG. 36), and in the small winning ending control process, control based on the small winning scenario is completed, and the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared (S1404 in FIG. 37).

Next, details of various tables held in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17. FIG.

First, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the first winning random number table 202a, the value "0 to 79" of the first winning random number counter C1 as the determination value of the big winning, and the value "0 to 79" of the first winning random number counter C1 as the determination value of the small winning. The value "300 to 399" is set as the value "80 to 299" of the first hit random number counter C1 as a determination value other than the big hit and the small hit (loss).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the special symbol lottery results in a big win with a probability of "1/5" and a small win with a probability of "1/4". is a small hit with a high probability. By constructing in this way, even when a big hit is not achieved due to the variation of special symbols, a small win is likely to occur, and the player expects whether or not the game ball can be passed through the V detection switch 650e5 in the small win game. Many opportunities can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a special symbol jackpot and the probability of a small hit are constant even if the game state changes, but the period of setting a high probability game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases, and the time saving game Some of them may be configured to increase the probability of winning a small prize. Also, a winning opening for starting the second special symbol may be provided so that the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning a small prize. In addition, although it is configured to execute a big hit when a game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, it is not limited to that, and a high probability game state (probability variation) is established until a predetermined condition is established (until the next big hit, or a predetermined It may be configured to give (up to the fluctuation of the special pattern of the number of times).

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 as the judgment value of the jackpot A is "50 to 99" as the judgment value of the jackpot B. ” is set.

Here, when a jackpot game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and game balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a to win a large number of prize balls. The game to win is executed. In addition, a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is imparted after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, in the normal game state, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is performed three times. Granted. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided nine times.

When the jackpot B is selected, in the normal game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not provided. . On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided three times. In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of times of time saving is limited and given, it may be configured to give until the next jackpot. In this case, by setting the jackpot type to which the time saving is not provided (or the number of times of the time saving is limited), it is possible to suppress that the jackpot continues excessively.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, by winning a special symbol jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), the state is always shifted to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. The number is set smaller than the jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the big win (jackpot C or jackpot D) executed by adding a specific area to the game ball during the small win game can make the player think that he/she has won the big win by himself/herself. This is to make the privilege of C or the jackpot D more advantageous to the player.

FIG. 14(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202d. As shown in FIG. 14(d), the second hit random number table 202d has a value "0 to 5" of the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal game state as the judgment value of the hit of the normal symbol, and in the time saving game state A value "0 to 239" is set for the second winning random number counter C4.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment wins with a probability of "1/40" in the normal game state, and wins with a probability of "1/1" in the time-saving game state.

FIG. 14(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. This variation pattern selection table 202e includes, as shown in FIG. At least a variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) is set. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Variation patterns for various jackpots are selected. Variation pattern selection table 202e2 for loss and variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small win are similar to the above-described variation pattern selection table for big win, variation patterns for various losses and variation patterns for various small wins based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected.

Next, the small hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the case of a special pattern small hit, the small hit type when the random number is "0 to 4" in the small hit type counter CS3 is "small hit A". . Further, when the random number is "5 to 9", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "10 to 199", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . First, when "small win A" is selected, a small win game corresponding to the small win scenario a202g1 is executed as shown in the small win scenario table 202g of FIG. 16(a). In the small winning game corresponding to the small winning scenario a202g1, as shown in FIG. An open scenario is set to open for 1.5 seconds. That is, as a result of the small winning game, it is possible for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and in that case, it is set to be able to give the big winning.

On the other hand, when "small win B" and "small win C" are selected, a small win game corresponding to the small win scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16(a)) is executed. In the winning game, as shown in FIG. 16(c), the opening/closing piece 650b is set to be in a closed state while the game ball can flow into the V passage 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. That is, as a result of the small winning game configured to make it difficult to win the V detection switch 650e5, the large winning is set to be impossible (difficult). For both "B" and "small win C", a special symbol variation time of 20 seconds is set.

Thus, by varying the opening pattern of the opening/closing piece 650b during the small winning game according to each small winning type, the game ball flows into the V passage channel 650e3, which is a small winning advantageous to the player of the small winning game. Possible small winning games and disadvantageous small winning games in which game balls cannot (difficultly) flow into the V passage 650e3 can be set, and various game characteristics can be provided. .

Next, referring to FIG. 16, the small winning scenario table 202g will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 202g. The small winning scenario table 202g is defined so that small winning scenarios corresponding to the small winning types selected by the small winning type selection table 202c can be selected, and a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning scenario. executed.

The small winning scenario table 202g has a small winning scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small winning A and a small winning scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small winning B or C as selected small winning scenarios.

First, the small winning scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG.16(b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of small hit scenario a202g1. When the small winning scenario a202g1 is set, the small winning scenario counter 203h starts counting (S1302 in FIG. 36), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h are executed. . Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small winning scenario a202g1 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the opening period for the small winning starts. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have passed), the small winning opening period ends, and a state (V route open state ), the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward. Then, when the counter value is updated to 376, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of 1 round). After that, when the counter value reaches 750 (3 seconds elapsed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the opening/closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

The closing condition (end condition) of the opening/closing piece 650b in one round of the pachinko machine 10 is when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, and when 10 balls are placed in the second specific winning hole 650a. This is the case when Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win in the second specific winning port 650a within 1.5 seconds after the opening and closing piece 650b is opened, the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is set to 749 ( It is configured to execute update processing until one round before the end of one round). In addition, in the small hit game, since the opening period of one round is set short, in reality, 10 balls will not be entered, and the opening period will pass, so before 10 balls are entered It is configured so that one round ends at As a result, it is configured so that prize balls are not given excessively in the small winning game, and is configured to be different from the big winning game.

With this configuration, after that, the counter value is incremented by 1, so that the counter value becomes 750 and the operation control for closing the opening/closing piece 650b is executed. is not required to be executed, the processing load can be reduced, and in the event that each round end condition occurs at approximately the same timing, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the operation control of the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2. .

Then, when the counter value is updated to 751, the ending period of the small win is started, the ending display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), the second variable winning. The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the game ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the V passage 650e3 in the device 650 (V route closed state). do. Then, when the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed), the small winning ending period is terminated.

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is opened to when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed, Since the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON and the opening/closing piece 650b is opened, it is possible to allow the game ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage 650e3. That is, the period (counter values 376 to 750 ) allows the game ball that entered the second specific winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage 650e3, and the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 to give the player a jackpot game. A small winning game will be provided.

Next, the small winning scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(c). FIG.16(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b202g2. This small winning scenario b202g2 is a small winning scenario in which the small winning type is set to the small winning B or the small winning C as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. This is a scenario that provides a small winning game.

When the small hit scenario b202g2 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the opening period of the small hit is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have passed), the small winning opening period ends, and a state (V route open state ), the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), the opening period for the small win ends, and the game ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the V passage channel 650e3 in the second variable prize winning device 650 ( The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so as to enter the V route closed state.

When the counter value is updated to 1001, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned on in order to open the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1375 (5.5 seconds have elapsed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the opening/closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

Then, when the first round ends, the small winning ending period is executed until the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed).

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is opened to when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed, Since the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is inoperative and the opening/closing piece 650b is in a closed state, the game ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a cannot flow down to the V passage 650e3, and the second specific winning hole All game balls entering the 650a are guided to the discharge channel 650e1. In other words, it is impossible to let the game ball that has entered the second specific winning hole 650a flow down to the V passage channel 650e3, to detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5, and to provide the player with a jackpot game ( It will provide a small hit game that is difficult).

As described above, in the small winning scenario a202g1 and the small winning scenario b202g2, the timing for setting the switching valve solenoid 650c2 to ON and OFF is the same as the small winning start timing (special figure stop timing), but the opening and closing piece solenoid The timing of turning on and off the 650f2 is different. By varying the timing of turning on and off the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 according to the type of small win in this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 detects the V detection switch 650e5. It is possible to set a small win (small win A in this embodiment) and a small win (small wins B and C in this embodiment) in which no big win is given to the player, thereby providing a variety of game characteristics. be able to.

In this embodiment, the start timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect of the small winning game is one second before the opening operation of the opening and closing piece 650b in both the small winning scenarios a202g1 and b202g2. Until that period, the third symbol display device 81 displays a fusion symbol effect (a battle effect between a monster and a hero). It is configured such that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small winning game corresponding to the small winning scenario b202g2. Therefore, it is made difficult for the player to discriminate the type of the small win during the display period of the opening effect, etc., and recognize in advance whether it is a small win that can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. The game can be actually played, and the game can be played in anticipation that the game ball will be detected by the V detection switch 650e5.

Next, the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, this general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202h includes a general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) and a general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (short time) (FIG. 17 ( b) see) is set at least.

First, with reference to Drawing 17 (a), a normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) is explained. FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (normal). The normal pattern variation pattern selection table (normal) is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the normal pattern variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state, and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 Based on this, various variation patterns (variation time and hit effect time) are selected.

In the normal pattern variation pattern selection table (normal), normal symbol per variation patterns A to C are set as variation patterns to be selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is a win, and in the normal game state Ordinary design loss fluctuation patterns A to C are set as fluctuation patterns to be selected when the lottery result of the ordinary design is out.

First, the normal symbol per variation patterns A to C selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is a win will be described. The normal per-symbol variation pattern A is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 79", and the normal per-symbol variation pattern B is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "80 to 149". 2, and the normal per symbol variation pattern C is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "150 to 198". For each of the normal per-symbol variation patterns A to C, a variation time of 10 seconds and a per performance time of 3 seconds are set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time for winning a normal symbol is set to 10 seconds. It is configured to take about 10 seconds to complete. Therefore, when passing through the through gate 67 and the lottery result is a hit, the game ball entering from the ball outlet 660a of the crew member 660 is discharged at the timing when the variation ends, so the first entering ball The game ball can flow down to the first ball entering device 64 in accordance with the timing when the opening/closing door of the device 64 is opened. Therefore, even when the player stops shooting the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the opening/closing door is opened.

Next, normal symbol loss variation patterns A to C selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is out will be described. The normal symbol deviation variation pattern A is a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 29", and the normal symbol deviation variation pattern B is a normal symbol variation. The value of the type counter CS2 is a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds set when the value is "30 to 99". This is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG.17(b), normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours) is demonstrated. FIG.17(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours). Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selected when it is in the time saving gaming state is defined. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is "1/1", and the normal symbol always hits.

Similar to the above-described general pattern variation pattern selection table (normal), various variation patterns are selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and for the jackpot variation pattern The only difference is that the selected variation pattern (variation time) is different, so the description is omitted.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the voice ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal figure variation pattern selection table 222b, a small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, and a pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. The variation pattern selection table 222a is already known and will be briefly described, but based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation content (variation time) is referred to when determining more detailed variation contents. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

Ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 222b and small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, like variation pattern table 222a, based on the general figure variation pattern command or variation pattern command output from main controller 110, the variation pattern command are referred to when determining more detailed variation contents from the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The pseudo-fluctuation pattern selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect display contents of pseudo-fluctuations that are executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the pseudo-fluctuation means that when the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started during the fluctuation of the special design, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, the fluctuation of the special design is normal. This is a variation that is executed after the special symbol variation is stopped in order to match the symbol variation start timing.

Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. be done.

Next, the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 18(b). FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. This pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d is a data table used to determine the display mode of the pseudo variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each effect type of the pseudo variation and the value of the effect counter 223g.

Here, the pseudo-fluctuation effect type will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 10(a), 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special design stops, there is no hit within the 2 hold of the normal design, and the normal design stops after the stop timing of the next special design. When the variation is being executed, the deviation pseudo variation is set in the variation time of the differential time t1 from when the variation of the special symbol stops until when the variation of the normal symbol stops.

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 10(b), the result of the determination of whether the special symbol starts to change is out, and if there is a hit in the next normal symbol 2 hold, the continuation pseudo for a maximum of 30 seconds. Variation is set.

The pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a pseudo fluctuation pattern based on the set production type and the value of the production counter 223g in the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S2102 in FIG. 44). Specifically, when the effect type is out, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 30", the "outfall pseudo fluctuation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is " 31 to 100", "off pseudo fluctuation pattern B" is selected, and when the value of the effect counter 223g is "101 to 198", "off pseudo fluctuation pattern C" is selected. be.

On the other hand, when the effect type is continuous, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 50", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is "51 to 130", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern B" is selected, and when the value of the effect counter 223g is "131-198", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern C" is selected.

In various continuous pseudo-fluctuation patterns, it is a pseudo-fluctuation of up to 30 seconds, and at the timing when the fluctuation of the special pattern starts, it is a production mode that can be switched to a re-fluctuation production (fluctuation production of the fusion pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the special pattern). It is configured. On the other hand, in the various outlier pseudo fluctuation patterns, blackout is set in the set pseudo fluctuation period.

Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 18(c). FIG. 18(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a normal pattern winning prize information storage area 223a, a normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b, a pseudo fluctuation flag 223c, a normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type At least a selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a pseudo setting flag 223h, and a pseudo fluctuation setting area 23i are provided.

The general pattern winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a second winning random number counter that is winning information. The value of C4 is stored. In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball passes through a through gate (ordinary pattern start opening) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the through gate passage is used to correspond to the through gate passage. Various information obtained when the lottery of normal symbols is performed (win or fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is voiced from the main controller 110 The lamp control device 113 is notified by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The general pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON when the general pattern fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1713 in FIG. 40), and in the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process, the third symbol display device It is set to OFF when the variable display of normal symbols is set in 81 (S2001 in FIG. 44). When the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern extracted from the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern command for display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S1602 in FIG. 39). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display general pattern variation pattern command, the general pattern variation pattern indicated by this display general pattern variation pattern command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started so that the variable display is performed.

Pseudo-variation flag 223c is a flag used to determine whether the display mode of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-variation, and is set to ON in the pseudo-variation start setting process (Fig. 44 S2104 of FIG. 43), is set to OFF in the variation pattern setting process (S1904 of FIG. 43). When this pseudo-fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON, even if it is the fluctuation start timing of the normal pattern, a new fluctuation in the fusion pattern is not started, and the normal pattern auxiliary pattern (normal pattern display area Ds1 is displayed) The fluctuation start is executed only with the symbol that is displayed).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, like the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of normal-pattern pending balls (number of standby times) of variable production that is suspended in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot obtain the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d counts the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is designed to manage

Specifically, in the main control unit 110, when the number of normal-pattern pending balls in the variable display is added by passing through the through gate 67, or in the main control unit 110, the variable display in the normal pattern is executed and the reserved ball When the number is subtracted, a normal pattern reserved ball number command indicating the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 is acquired from the normal pattern reserved ball number command. Then, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S1710 in FIG. 40). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is updated, the normal symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

The value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d is used for displaying the normal pattern reserved ball number pattern in the third design display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d in response to the reception of the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and the normal symbol reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of normal-map reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the normal pattern reserved number display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the number of normal design reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third design display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON when a special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S1702 in FIG. 40), and in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), the It is set to OFF when the variable display of special symbols in the 3-symbol display device 81 is set (S1901 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S1602 in FIG. 39). It is transmitted towards device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S1705 in FIG. 40), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S1808 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop symbol of the fusion pattern corresponding to the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the stop type command for display. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used when determining a variation pattern of pseudo variation and various variations. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1611 in FIG. 39).

The pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON in order to execute pseudo variation. This pseudo setting flag 223h is that the start of the variation display is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), and the special symbol lottery result (at the time of the variation start) is out, and the next normal symbol 2 It is set to ON when there is a hit in the hold (S1910 in FIG. 43). That is, the pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the pseudo variation after the special symbols are stopped during the variation of the special symbols. Also, in the pseudo variation setting process (see S1614 in FIG. 45), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to off 5 seconds before the stop of the special figure variation, and if there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 hold, or , It is set to ON when it is a period in which the normal pattern fluctuation that stops after the stop timing of the special pattern is executed (S2210, 2213 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S2107 in FIG. 41). By setting the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON, the pseudo variation is started after the special symbol variation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency that the fusion symbol stops at the lost symbol, and to reduce the frequency that the player is disappointed with the determination result of the failure. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if the fused symbols are changed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making the player play the game with higher expectations.

The pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i is a storage area in which fluctuation data (fluctuation period, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of the pseudo fluctuation is set.

The pending number counter 223 j is a counter for setting the number of pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, as described above, during the variation of the special symbol or during the pseudo variation, a new variation of the normal symbol is not started with the fusion symbol, but is executed only with the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. In this case, the reserved design of the normal design displayed on the third design display device 81 is not dared to be updated, but is configured to appear as if one variation of the fusion design corresponds to one variation of the reserved design. is doing. However, in this case, a difference occurs between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, by independently providing a counter for displaying the reserved design, it is configured so that the difference from the actual number of reservations can be grasped, and when a difference occurs as described later, a new normal design In the fluctuation of the fusion pattern corresponding to the start of the fluctuation, the pseudo continuous figure fluctuation that performs the pseudo stop is executed, and the holding number counter 223j is subtracted at the timing of the pseudo stop so that it matches the actual holding number. configured to make corrections. Therefore, even if there is a difference from the actual number of reservations, correction can be made. In addition, when the reservation of the normal pattern is not stored in the state where the difference occurs, the difference from the actual reservation is corrected by configuring the fusion pattern to change by 1 in a pseudo-disconnected manner. It is preferable to correct by configuring as follows.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined address is the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) executed after the boot process (S2301 in FIG. 46) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 48(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2303 and S2304 in FIG. 46).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable performance in the case of ``big hit with special pattern'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable performance in the case of ``missing the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 20(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

As shown in FIG. 21, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 moves the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 20(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's will, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 19) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the through gate 67, the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately start the variable performance. You can prevent the condition from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending effect. The longer the time period of this normal pattern, the more chances the game ball will pass through the first ball entrance 64a, so the chances of lottery for special patterns increase and the chances of winning special patterns also increase. become more. Therefore, there are more chances that the opening and closing door associated with the first ball entrance 64a will be opened as a result of a special symbol jackpot, so that the game ball can easily enter the specific winning entrance 65a. In addition, since the opening and closing piece 650b is opened more frequently as a special symbol hit, the game ball easily enters the second specific winning port 650a, and the game ball flows into the V passage 650e3. becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that a jackpot game will be awarded, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64a is a prize winning opening in which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters, so that a jackpot of normal symbols is opened and closed accompanying the first ball entrance 64a. When the door is opened and it becomes easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64a, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 (S2305 in FIG. 46). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, It is set to OFF (S4605 in FIG. 60(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S2601 in FIG. 48B), and the simple image display flag 233c When the display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48B) and the simple display setting process (see S2608 in FIG. (b) S2609) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (FIG. 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S4501 in FIG. 60A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (FIG. 60(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 61) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (FIG. 23) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (FIG. 23) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 executes display setting processing for V interrupt processing (S2603 in FIG. 58) based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed. ), pointer update processing (S4205 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 23), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame image are completed, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (S4207 in FIG. 58). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (S2302 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S4713 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (S4714 in FIG. 61), The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S4802 in FIG. 62).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed (S4803 in FIG. 62) each time the rendering process of the process (FIG. 48B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 to 37. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter CS3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (399, 99, 99, 239 and 199 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 (counter buffer 203i).

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81, etc., along with the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37. (S104), and thereafter, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64a is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 A thru-gate passing process is executed as the ball passes (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further the V passage time processing (S109) is executed. The details of this V passage time process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the process of S109, other processes to be periodically executed are then executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (starting opening) (S203). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (S203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S203: Yes), the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stopped. The values of the type counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area (S204).

When the process of S204 is finished, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S205), and the process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S206). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S206: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S206, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S206: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S207). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S205), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S205) is executed, a special symbol stop symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot A or B is a jackpot according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the predetermined LEDs of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37 are lit in blue, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S207 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) (this lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S208). Then, if the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S208: Yes), a jackpot scenario table (not shown) is used to set a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (S209). When the processing of S209 is finished, the value of the counter 203d during time saving is set from the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)) based on the jackpot type and game state game state (normal game state, time saving game state) Then (S210), the process proceeds to S215.

On the other hand, in the processing of S208, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S208: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a small hit of the special symbol (S211). In the processing of S211, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the small winning of the special symbol (S211: Yes), small winning start setting processing is executed to start the small winning (S212), and S213. to process. Details of the small winning start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S211, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S211: No), the lottery result of this time is a loss of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S213.

In the process of S213, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203d is greater than 0 (S213). The value of the time saving counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S214), and the process proceeds to S215. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203d is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S215.

In the process of S215 executed after the process of S210, S213 or S214, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S207 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the fluctuation stop of special symbols, special symbol auxiliary symbols, etc. displayed in (S215).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start process (S205) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S205). This special symbol variation start process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. Based on the values of various counters, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a (S301). Next, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S301 is obtained (S302). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 of the special symbol is acquired.

After finishing the process of S302, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the process of S302 (S303). More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S302 is compared with the big winning judgment value stored in the first winning random number table 202a to acquire the lottery result. As described above, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 79", the lottery result is a big win, and when the value is "300 to 399", the lottery result is a small win (Fig. 14 (a) )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S303 is a big win (S304). In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S304: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set (S305).

More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first big winning type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots It is determined what the jackpot type is among the types (jackpot A, jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10(b)).

In the processing of S305, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the process of S305 is finished, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301, the big winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 14(d)) is referred to determine the big winning variation pattern (S306 ), and the process proceeds to S312.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S304: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S307). In the process of S307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S308), and acquired in the process of S301. A small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S312.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S310).

When the processing of S310 is completed, an outlier variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

In the processing of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the missing symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S301 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

After completing the processing of S306, S309 or S311, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is set (S312). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S305, S308 or S310 is set (S313). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 33). be. When the process of S313 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the small winning start setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S212). This small winning start setting process (S212) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning game.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 By passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5), a big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state that increases the possibility of being

Returning to FIG. 27, the description continues. In the small winning start setting process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small winning A (S401). In the process of S401, if it is determined to be a small hit A (S401: Yes), using the small hit scenario table 202g, set a small hit scenario a202g1 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) ( S402), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, if it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S401: No), using the small hit scenario table 202g, a small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) It sets (S403) and terminates this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) and the first entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the mouth 64a.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the normal pattern (second pattern) winning, the second pattern display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a. while being controlled. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (not 0). (S504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted, and the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

When the processing of S507 is completed, it is next determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol working hours (whether or not the value of the working hours counter 203d is greater than 0) (S508). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving mode (the value of the time saving mode counter 203d is greater than 0) (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress. (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

In the process of S509, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. That is, in the time-saving state, it always hits the normal pattern. (See FIG. 14(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S509, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511.

Also, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving mode of the normal pattern (the value of the time saving counter 203d is 0) (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S511). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "6 to 239", the normal design is off. (see FIG. 14(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S510 or S511 is a hit of the normal symbol (S512). When it is determined that the win is the normal symbol (S512: Yes), the display mode at the time of the win is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S513), and the process proceeds to S515. In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of the pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S514), and the process proceeds to S515. . In the process of S514, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S515, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is obtained (S515), and then it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (whether the value of the counter 203d during time saving is greater than 0) (S516).

When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving mode (the value of the time saving counter 203d is greater than 0) (S516: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress. (S517). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

In the process of S517, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S517: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so it is obtained in the process of S515. Based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state, the normal symbol per variation pattern is selected, and the determined variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114. A figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S518). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol variation pattern D (variation time 3 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol Select variation pattern E (variation time 3 seconds). Also, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern F (fluctuation time 3 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17(b)). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the process of S518 ends, the gaming state is in the time saving mode, so the opening time of the electric accessary (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S519). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S516, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving of normal symbols (the value of the counter 203d during time saving is 0) (S516: No), and in the processing of S517, the special symbols If the jackpot is in progress (S517: Yes), the process proceeds to S520.

In the processing of S520, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot of special symbols. Based on the normal pattern variation pattern selection table for the game state, the normal pattern per variation pattern is selected, and the normal pattern variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S520). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the normal game state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol variation pattern A (variation time 10 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol Select variation pattern B (variation time 10 seconds). Also, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17(a)). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S520 ends, the gaming state is not the time saving mode, so the opening time of the electric accessary (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S521). , the process ends.

In this way, when the game state of the normal design is the time saving game state (during time saving), the game state of the normal design is compared with the normal game state (during non time saving), the time of fluctuation display is "10 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is lengthened to "2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the first entrance A state is created in which the ball can easily enter the ball opening 64a.

Also, in the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S522). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S518 or the process of S520 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S522, if the variable time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S514, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S514.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S524). If the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the control start of opening and closing of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set (S525), and this process is executed. finish.

By the processing of S525, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory (opening and closing door) is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see S1006) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, the electric role The opening and closing control of the object (opening and closing door) is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory (opening and closing door) is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S519 or S521 are completed. After the process of S525 is executed, a normal pattern stop command indicating the normal pattern stop is set (S526). This general figure stop command is a command for notifying the normal symbol stop to the audio lamp control device 113 .

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203c (S604). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c added in the process of S604, the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S605).

Normal figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1001) of main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the normal pattern reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

When the processing of S605 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S606). In addition, in the processing of S606, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the process of S606 and the second per random number table 202d are obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result (S607), and the general pattern pre-determination result is based on the general pattern A winning information command is set (S608), and this process ends.

The normal figure winning prize information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the general pattern winning information command, it extracts the general pattern pre-determination result from the general pattern winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the general pattern winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the general pattern preliminary determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V passing time process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this V-passing process (S109). This V passing time processing (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and whether the passage of the game ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 is normal. This is a process for determining

In this V passage time processing (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 provided in the V passage channel 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 detects a game ball (S701). In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has not detected the game ball, that is, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S701: No), this processing exit. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected a game ball (S701: Yes), then the V passable period (Fig. 16 (b) to (c)) is determined (S702).

In the processing of S702, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S702: No), an error command is set (S703), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if it is determined that it is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S702: Yes), the value of the acquired first hit type counter is read (S704 ). That is, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpot types (jackpot A , jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined as a jackpot A (15R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", a jackpot B (15R jackpot) (see FIG. 14(b)).

Next, the V flag 203f indicating the jackpot type read in S704 is set to ON (S705), and the V passage command is set (S706). After that, the value of the counter 203d during time reduction corresponding to the jackpot type and the game state is set (S707).

In this way, even during a small winning game with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period during which the winning is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball outside the passable period, an error command is set without turning on the V flag 203f, and this process is terminated. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, the V flag 203f is not set to ON, so even if the game ball is illegally passed through the specific area during the small winning game, The jackpot game is not executed after the end. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area is normal, and a configuration for determining whether there is an abnormality (error) is used. configuration may be used.

For example, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can pass through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during one small winning game is one by controlling the operation of each component of the second variable winning device 650. is employed. Therefore, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal.

In addition, in this embodiment, after it is determined that the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, it is determined whether the detection of the game ball (passing through the specific area) is within the passable period. Detection of a game ball outside the possible period (passing through a specific area) can be processed as an abnormality. It may be configured to determine whether the detection switch 650e5 has detected a game ball.

Furthermore, based on the detection result of the passing detection switch 650as for detecting the entry of the ball into the inflow port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the V detection switch 650e5 which is the specific area, during one small winning game In spite of the passing detection switch 650as not detecting the game ball, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball may be determined to be abnormal.

By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games such as causing game balls to stay in the V passage channel 650e3 and allowing the game balls to pass through a specific area within the passable period.

In addition, means for determining whether or not the current small winning game is a small winning that can pass through V is provided, and using the determination result, even if the small winning is impossible (difficult) to pass V A case where the detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball may be determined to be abnormal.

In addition, the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the game ball that first wins in the second variable winning device 650 after the small winning game is executed can win the V passage 650e3 as in the present embodiment. , it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

In other words, when a game ball is illegally tried to pass through the V detection switch 650e5, which is the specific area, the V detection switch is detected even though no ball is won in the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. When the 650e5 detects a game ball, it can be determined to be abnormal, and if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game, the V detection switch 650e5 detects two game balls. It becomes possible to determine that it is abnormal.

In addition, if the small winning game this time is a small winning game that cannot pass V, the game ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the V detection switch 650e5, so the V detection switch 650e5 is turned on. Although only one game ball passes, it can be determined as abnormal because the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball during a small winning game in which V cannot pass.

It should be noted that an error command may be set and output externally if the determination result of each abnormality determination process described above is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the error command may include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for easily determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is caused by an illegal game. If it is determined that the number of balls passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) is larger than that of the passing detection switch 650as), the possibility of illegal play is high, so priority information with a high priority is set, and priority information with a low priority is set. The abnormality in which it is determined that the ball passed through the specific area outside the passable period during the winning game may be caused by playing with the ball, so priority information with a low priority is set.

In this way, none of the abnormalities can occur in a proper game. can be preferentially notified, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of the abnormality can be performed smoothly.

It should be noted that all of the abnormality determination processes for passage of the game ball to the specific area may be combined, or some of them may be combined as appropriate.

Here, as a result of each abnormality determination process described above, an error command that is set when an abnormality is determined is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. 33), in the external output process (S1001), it is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the sound lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the process of S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 33), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the normal pattern reserved ball number command and normal pattern winning information command set in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34) and the small hit opening command set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the error command set in the V-passing process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

In addition, the external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by means of an external terminal board (not shown). there is

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After finishing the process of S1004, a small hit control process is executed (S1005). Details of the small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although small hit control processing (S1005) is performed in main processing, you may perform in timer interruption processing.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64b associated with the first entrance 64a is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is started when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is set by the process of S524 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or S518 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S507). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first pattern display device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S517 or the process of S519 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or S514 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the initial setting processing (S901 in FIG. 32) The process of S1001 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33). This is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the device 65. FIG.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S209 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) or the processing of S1406 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 37) described later is executed, and it is determined whether the big winning scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (S1102), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g increases. It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1103). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is 1. determine whether

In the process of S1103, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the opening start (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1103: Yes), an opening command for jackpot is set (S1104), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1103: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (in the jackpot scenario a If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251 (S1105).

In the process of S1105, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the process of S1106. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is in an open state), then set the round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start ( S1107), this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is established (S1108). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls win after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is changed to the current round. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1109), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of S1108, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured such that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is updated (added) and an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value is executed. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have won in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) When closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and the jackpot scenario is not based when a predetermined number of prizes have been won. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both types of motion control are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description continues. In the processing of S1108, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not met (S1108: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round. (S1110).

In the process of S1110, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round (S1110: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the process of S1111. (the specific door solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is closed), and the process ends. Incidentally, the determination process from S1105 to S1110 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1110, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the end of the round (S1110: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the interval. If it is the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the interval (S1112: Yes), the interval command is set (S1113), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: No), next, jackpot ending control processing (S1114) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1114). This jackpot ending control process (S1114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1201: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1202), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1201: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the ending (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000 (S1203). In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1204), and then the jackpot The scenario counter 203g is reset to 0 (S1205). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended. Then, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 36, small hit control processing (S1005) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit by the sound lamp control device 113, This is a process of controlling the operation of an opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening/closing the opening/closing piece 650b associated with the prize winning port 650a, and a switching valve solenoid 650c2 for rotating the switching valve 650b3 for switching the flow path.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S1301). Specifically, the processes of S402 and S403 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 27) are executed, and it is determined whether the small winning scenario is set. In the process of S1301, if the small winning scenario is not set (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if a small winning scenario is set (S1301: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h (S1302), and the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a small winning It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the scenario (S1303). For example, when the small winning scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the value of the counter 203h is 1 Determine whether the

In the process of S1303, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the opening start (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1) (S1303: Yes), by the processing of S1304, the small A winning opening command is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. Here, at the opening of the small winning, the display mode indicating the start of the small winning game is set on the third symbol display device 81 one second before the opening timing of the opening/closing piece 650b regardless of the small winning type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the small winning type based on the difference in the length of the display mode of the opening. In addition, it may be constructed such that, when a small win is made, the presentation of the fusion pattern (the battle between the hero and the monster) is continuously displayed without displaying the opening presentation. By configuring in this way, since the player recognizes the start of the small winning game as the opening timing of the opening and closing piece 650b, it is possible to make it difficult to identify the small winning type.

On the other hand, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value that does not correspond to the start of opening (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1305. In the processing of S1305, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 of the small winning scenario (V passage passage 650e3 is opened) (S1305). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid ON (V passage passage 650e3 open) is 375, It is determined whether the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is 375 or not.

In the processing of S1305, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h turns on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: Yes), the processing of S1306 to turn on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (to open the V passage 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates downward). Then, the process proceeds to S1307.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid ON (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: No), the processing of S1307 to

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of the small winning scenario switching valve solenoid OFF (V passage channel 650e3 closed) (S1307). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (V passage passage 650e3 closed) is 1000, It is determined whether the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is 1000 or not.

In the process of S1307, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid OFF (if the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1000) (S1307: Yes), by the process of S1308 , the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off (to close the V passage 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates upward). Then, the process proceeds to S1309.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S1309). For example, when the small winning scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponding to the round start (round start) is 376, so the small winning scenario counter 203h Determine if the value is 376.

In the process of S1309, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the start of the round (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 376) (S1309: Yes), by the processing of S1310, the small Based on the winning scenario, the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be opened and closed (the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned on so that the opening/closing piece 650b of the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state), and the process proceeds to S1311. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1309: No), the process proceeds to S1311.

In the processing of S1311, it is determined whether or not the round end condition is met (S1311). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) win in total while the second specific winning port 650a is open, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is established (S1311: Yes), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is increased by 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control after the next time. there is

Here, the small winning scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small winning counter 203h and to execute the operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, similarly to the above-described big winning scenario. there is Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific prize winning port 650a and the round end condition is established, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (renewal of the counter value). In the case of (closing the second specific winning opening 650a), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is configured to be updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed ( It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, operation control (for example, operation control for ending the round when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is not associated with the passage of time (update of the counter value) is performed based on the small winning scenario. It is possible to execute Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning port 650a, when a predetermined time has elapsed, operation control is performed based on the small winning scenario, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, operation control is not based on the small winning scenario. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as executing , which simplifies the design and prevents a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not established (S1311: No), the process proceeds to S1313. In the processing of S1313, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 750) (S1313). In the process of S1313, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the process of S1313. (The opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing piece 650b of the second specific winning port 650a is closed), and the process proceeds to S1315.

On the other hand, in the process of S1313, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the end of the round (S1313: No), the process proceeds to S1315.

In the process of S1315, a small winning ending control process (S1315) is executed. This small winning ending control process is the ending period in the small winning game, that is, the process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small winning game to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. is.

Next, the small winning ending control process (S1314) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S1314). This small winning ending control process (S1314) is a process executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 36).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 751) (S1401). In the processing of S1401, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1401: Yes), a small winning ending command is set (S1402), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1401: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the ending (small winning If it is scenario a202g1, it is determined whether the counter value is 1500 (S1403). In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1403: Yes), the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared, and the small winning scenario counter 203h is reset to 0 ( S1404). Then, the process proceeds to S1405.

In S1405, it is determined whether the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405). In the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is not set to ON (S1405: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203f set in S705 of FIG. Set (S1406). Then, the V flag 203f is set to OFF (S1407), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game, the big hit based on the value of the first per type counter C2 acquired by the fluctuation of the small hit Although it is configured to determine the type, it is not limited to this, and is configured to determine the jackpot type by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. may

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of the main processing (Fig. 39 (see S1618 of )) is determined (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1615 in FIG. 39), it executes power-off processing in S1618. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1618 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1618. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), it will transfer to S1504 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1618 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1618, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1506). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1618 is executed (see S1617 in FIG. 39). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1618 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1618 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1509) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1510), an interrupt Permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1510), interrupt permission is set. (S1511). Then, it shifts to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1509 is skipped is that when the process of S1508 is reached from S1504 via the process of S1506, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1601 was executed (S1601). If the time has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1612, the change display setting process of S1613, and the pseudo change setting process of S1614 in short cycles. By executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from failing to be received. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending ball number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen. The settings are sent as commands to the display controller 114 . In the pending ball number display update process, the process of lighting the pending lamp (Ds3) according to the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 223d is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 34 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1609, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S1611), and the processing proceeds to S1612.

In the process of S1612, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1612). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1613). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1613, pseudo fluctuation setting processing is executed (S1614). Pseudo-fluctuation means that when the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started during the fluctuation of the special design, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, the fluctuation of the special design starts and the fluctuation of the normal design. It is a variable performance that is executed to match the start timing. The pseudo variation setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but even after the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped, it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation is to be executed by the fusion symbol. is executed.

When the processing of S1614 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1617), and the power-off processing is executed (S1618). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1619), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1616), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1616: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1616: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1612). This command determination process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1612), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1701). When the variation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If no variation pattern command has been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the special symbol has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). Then, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), a pseudo fluctuation start setting process is executed (S1708), and this process ends. This pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. A process to be executed according to the design is executed.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708), first, it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101: Yes), since the pseudo fluctuation setting is set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i, as a process of setting the start of pseudo fluctuation, The processing of S2103 to S2107 is executed. In the process of S2103, the value of the production counter 223g is acquired (S2103), and the production type (continuation production or out of production, fluctuation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the value of the production counter 223g obtained Based on, a pseudo variation pattern is selected from the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18(b)) corresponding to the effect type (S2104). A display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2105). This display pseudo-fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-fluctuation pattern. After that, the pseudo change flag 223c is set to ON (S2106), and the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S2107). After that, this process ends. In the case of continuation, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the off pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is set by processing into the production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2101: No), the stop command for display is set (S2102), and this processing ends. The stop command for display set here is a command indicating the stop of the special symbol. Based on this command, the fusion pattern and the special figure auxiliary pattern are synchronously stopped and displayed (determined stop display).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the execution of the pseudo variation is set at the timing of stopping the special symbol (the timing of receiving the stop command), the start of the pseudo variation is set. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly continue the pseudo-variation, and to provide the player with a variation of the natural fusion effect.

Here, return to FIG. 40 and continue the description. In the process of S1707, if the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), next, it is determined whether or not the command for the number of normal chart pending balls has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). In the process of S1709, when the normal pattern reserved ball number command is received (S1709: Yes), the normal pattern reserved ball number counter corresponding to the received normal pattern reserved ball number command, the received normal pattern reserved ball number command is stored, and 1 is added to the number of retained balls counter 223j to update it (S1710). Specifically, from the received general pattern reserved ball number command, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (the number of times of holding variable display in the normal pattern M) is extracted, and this is the voice lamp control device Stored in the 113 normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. After that, set a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j (S1711), and finish this process. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display of reserved symbols is set in the display control device 114 based on the value of the reserved number counter 223j. In the configuration of the present embodiment, as already described above, when a specific condition is established, a pseudo variation is executed in a fusion symbol across variations in a plurality of normal symbols. In the meantime, in order to make it look as if it is 1 change, the display of the reserved pattern of the normal pattern is not subtracted (the effect of reducing (digesting) the “black circle pattern” is executed), and the actual number of reserved patterns of the normal pattern A difference occurs in the number of reserved symbols displayed. However, as will be described later, if there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the displayed number of reserved symbols, a special variation is set at the start of the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol. A short variation of pseudo-stopping in seconds is executed, the value of the pending number counter 223j is decremented at that timing, and the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are updated based on it. As a result, the difference can be corrected to a normal state, and the problem of making the player feel uncomfortable can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo-stop is made during the variation of the actual normal symbol. It may be configured to execute an effect of eliminating the suspension in which the difference is caused by changing by 1 per second.

Here, the normal pattern holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball passes through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67, or when the normal pattern lottery is performed. Each time gate passage is detected, or each time a normal symbol lottery is performed, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the normal symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1710. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, for example, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, through-gate passage is detected. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 at the time or the lottery of the normal symbol. Further, for example, when the process of S1711 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j is issued. set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the reserved number counter 223j is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the processing of S1709, if the normal pattern reserved ball number command has not been received (S1709: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1712). Then, when the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received (S1712: Yes), the general figure fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1713), and the general figure fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received general figure fluctuation pattern command ( S1714). After that, this process is terminated.

In the processing of S1712, if the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not the general pattern winning information command is received from the main controller 110 (S1715). Then, when the universal figure winning information command is received (S1715: Yes), the winning information based on the received universal figure winning information command is stored in the general figure winning information storage area 223a (S1716), and this process ends. . Here, the winning information includes information based on the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2.

In the processing of S1715, if the general pattern winning information command has not been received (S1715: No), it is determined whether the general pattern stop command has been received (S1717). When it is determined that the normal map stop command is received (S1717: Yes), the normal map stop command for display is set (S1718). This normal map stop command for display is a command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is time to stop the normal map. On the other hand, if it is determined that the general map stop command has not been received (S1717: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1717 ), the process ends. In the processing of S1719, for example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1613). This variable display setting process (S1613) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the various variation pattern commands received from the main controller 110, various variation pattern commands for display are generated and set. Further, when the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (see S1708 in FIG. 41) is executed.

In the variable display setting process (S1613), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1804. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S1801: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1802). The details of this variation pattern selection process (S1802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1802 is completed, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1803). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1804). Then, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, it is off) (S1804: No), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so The process proceeds to S1807. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is ON (S1804: Yes), normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1805). The details of this general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1805 is finished, based on the obtained normal pattern fluctuation pattern type, to generate a display normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114, and to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1806). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1807, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1807). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S1807: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process is ended, and the process of S1812 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1808). A stop symbol in the medium symbol row of the fusion symbols in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is extracted (S1809).

Next, based on the stop pattern in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1810), and sets a stop type command for display (S1811). After that, the process of S1812 is executed. The stop type command for display is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol of the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol.

In the processing of S1812, it is determined whether or not it is the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo continuous chart fluctuation (S1812). Pseudo continuous figure fluctuation is, when a difference occurs between the values of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j, when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is set, 2 seconds It is a special variation pattern in which the normal pattern starts to vary again after the pseudo stop at . In the process of S1802, it is determined whether it is the timing of this pseudo stop. When it is determined that it is the timing of the pseudo stop (S1812: Yes), the value of the reservation number counter 223j is updated by subtracting 1 (S1813), and the values of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 223d and the reservation number counter 223j (S1814). After that, this process ends. By constructing in this manner, the number of pending games counter 223j is decremented by 1 at the timing of the pseudo stop, and one pending symbol is also consumed. Therefore, it is possible to correct the actual number of reservations and the displayed number of reservations. On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that it is not the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo Renpoku fluctuation (S1812: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1802) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1802). The fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, the variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S1901), and then in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command The variation pattern type is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1902).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON (S1903: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S1904). Next, set the end of the pseudo-variation, generate a display command indicating the end of the pseudo-variation, set (1905) to transmit the command to the display control device 114, and then move to the processing of S1906 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1903, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1903: No), the processing of S1904 and S1905 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1906. In the processing of S1906, the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1906). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern and the value of the production counter 223g, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a or the small winning variation pattern selection table 222c corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol (S1907).

When the processing of S1907 is finished, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol of the variation is out (S1908). If the determination result of the special symbol of the variation is not out (that is, hit) (S1908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out (S1908: Yes), it is determined whether there is a hit in the next normal symbol 2 hold (S1909). If there is no winning within the next two reserved symbols (S1909: No), this process is terminated. If there is a win in the next normal symbol 2 hold (S1909: Yes), set the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON (S1910: Yes), and set the continuous pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i for a maximum of 30 seconds ( After performing S1911), this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 44, normal figure fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1805) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805). This general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

When the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, first, the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2001), then in the process of S1714 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), extracted from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command The general pattern variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2002). When the processing of S2002 is completed, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 and updated (S2003). After that, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (S2004). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (S2004: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (that is, whether the fusion symbol is performing pseudo-variation) (S2006). If it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is not set to ON (that is, the fusion pattern is not pseudo-varied) (S2006: No), then the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (that is , whether the execution start of the pseudo-variation is confirmed) (S2007).

When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2007: No), the value of the pending number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S2008). Here, at the timing of executing the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805), which is the process of starting a new variation of the normal symbol, the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol is not performed, and the start of the pseudo variation is also determined. If there is not, since the fusion pattern is also variably displayed corresponding to the variation start timing of the normal symbol, the value of the pending number counter 223j is subtracted, and the normal displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is The number of symbols is also digested (deleted one) and updated.

It is determined whether or not the value of the reserved number counter 223j and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are equal (S2009). When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are different values (S2009: No), the pseudo-renfu diagram corresponding to the type of the extracted normal figure fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is set (S2011). After that, the process of S2012 is executed. This pseudo Renfu figure fluctuation pattern is provided corresponding to each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. , the variation production of the fusion symbol similar to the variation pattern of the corresponding normal symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, a display is executed in which the game temporarily stops after 2 seconds, then changes again for 1 second, and then stops again.

On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are the same (S2009: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired. , Based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern type and the value of the production counter 223g, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern type (fusion pattern fluctuation effect) is selected from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 222b (S2010). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S2004: Yes), and in the process of S2006, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2006: Yes), and, in the process of S2007, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2007: Yes), in the fluctuation period based on the acquired normal figure fluctuation pattern type, the second The variable display of the normal pattern auxiliary pattern displayed in the normal pattern display area Ds1 of the 3-pattern display device 81 is set (S2005), and then the process is terminated. In this way, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the fusion pattern, the fluctuation of the fusion pattern is not started in response to the start of the fluctuation of the new normal pattern, and the fluctuation is started only with the normal pattern auxiliary pattern. , it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo variation of the fusion pattern becomes complicated.

Next, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614). This pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the pseudo fluctuation setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2201). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo-variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 has passed (S2202). . The variation time of the pseudo variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set in S1911 of FIG. 43 or S2209 or S2212 of FIG. 45, and if this variation time has not passed (S2202: No), this Terminate the process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation being executed has passed (S2202: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S2203), and the pseudo fluctuation is stopped by the stop type command A stop is set at the set stop symbol (a symbol displayed as a middle symbol in a pseudo variation) (S2204). Next, a display command indicating the stop of the pseudo-variation is set (S2205), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not set to ON in the process of S2201 (that is, it is set to OFF) (S2201: No), 5 seconds before the variation of the special symbol outside stops (S2206). If it is determined that it is not 5 seconds before the stop of the special symbols that are out (S2206: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out is stopped (S2206: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2207: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is not set to ON (that is, it is set to OFF) (S2207: No), it is determined whether there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 hold ( S2208). If it is determined that there is a hit within the next two reservations of the normal symbol (S2208: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2209). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2210), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next two holdings of the normal symbols (S2208: No), it is a period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed. (S2211). Here, the period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed is the variation of the currently varying normal symbols than the variation of the special symbols that are performing the variation. It is a period in which it can be discriminated that the fluctuation of the ordinary pattern which starts to fluctuate anew during the fluctuation of the special pattern continues to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special pattern which is currently fluctuating is stopped.

In the processing of S2211, when it is determined that the period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is not executed (S2211: No), this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped later than the timing when the variation of the special symbols is stopped is executed (S2211: Yes), the variation of the normal symbols being executed and the deviation pseudo variation In order to match the stop timing, the pseudo variation is set by the differential seconds t1 (see FIG. 10(a)) from the end of the variation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the variation of the normal symbol (S2212). ). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2213), and this processing is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, by combining the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 and displaying them together with the fusion symbol, the complicated game property is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. can be done. Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced in flow speed upstream of the first ball entrance 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol is hit by the crew member 660, so that the game ball is played by the shooting device. It is configured to increase the chances of winning the first ball entrance 65a even during the period when the ball is not launched.

Furthermore, when the special pattern loss variation is executed, the judgment result in the normal pattern 2 retention is discriminated, and if the winning ball is stored, the period is longer than the variation ends. Since the judgment result of being out is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special pattern can be connected with the variation of the fused pattern of one variation by the success of the next normal pattern, and can be produced.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 62. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2301), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2301) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2401). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2402). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2402, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2402, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. A predetermined amount of the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a out of the stored control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2403). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2404), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) (S2405), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2301) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Since high processing performance can be maintained, it is possible to easily execute diversified or complicated effects using the auxiliary effect section.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2401 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2401. and the processing of S2402 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2403 to S2405 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2403 to S2405 without performing the processes of S2401 and S2402 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2302). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2303). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2303, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2304, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2305). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4502 in FIG. 60B).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 48(b) S2608) and simple display setting processing (see S2609 in FIG. 48(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2305, interrupt permission is set (S2306), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2306, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 48(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601). If it is off (S2601: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S2602) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2603) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process (S2602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2603), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2602), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2604). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2603) or the simple display setting processing (S2609). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2605). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2606). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2605), 23, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2607). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2607, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2601: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S2608) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S2609) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2604.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, the details of the command determination process (S2602), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2702). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2704), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2705) and returns to the processing of S2701.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2705) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2801).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2804), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2805)), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, the display data table buffer 233d is set by the process of S2801 The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process, and image data of sprites required in the set variable display data table are stored in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2803 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2704, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2706), If there is a display variation type command (S2706: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the stop type command process (S2707) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information (shown by the stop class command for display) is determined (S2901), and the stop class table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48(b) ) is executed, the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time is executed, and finally the stop symbol after the variable effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S2903), this stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2902. In the above-described task processing (S2604), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2903, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the process of S2706, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2708), If there is a command (S2708: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the win-related command process (S2709) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing. This win-related command processing includes the win-related commands (jackpot opening command for display, number of rounds for display command, final round command for display, jackpot interval command for display, jackpot ending command for display, display It is a process for executing a process corresponding to a small winning opening command for display, a small winning ending command for display, and a V passing command for display.

In the hit-related command process (S2709), first, in the unprocessed new command, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot opening command for display (S3001), and if there is a jackpot opening command for display (S3001: Yes) , the jackpot opening command process is executed (S3002), and the process proceeds to S3003.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S3002) will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). FIG. 52(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot opening command process (S3002). This jackpot opening command process (S3002) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot opening command process, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the big hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001: No), the process of S3002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3003. In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3003), and if there is a display round number command (S3003: Yes), the round number command process is executed. (S3004), and the process proceeds to S3005.

Details of the round number command processing (S3004) will now be described with reference to FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S3004). The number-of-rounds command process (S3004) is for executing the process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202). Then, based on the set number of rounds display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3205), the round number command processing is terminated, and the winning related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3003 that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands (S3003: No), the process of S3004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3005. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3005), and if there is a final round command for display (S3005: Yes), final round command processing is executed. (S3006), and the process proceeds to S3007.

Details of the final round command process (S3006) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the final round command processing (S3006). This final round command process (S3006) is for executing the process corresponding to the final round command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the final round command process, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3302). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), the final round command processing is terminated, and the winning-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3005 that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S3005: No), the process of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3007. In the processing of S3007, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3007), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S3007: Yes), jackpot interval command processing is executed. (S3008), and the process proceeds to S3009.

Here, with reference to FIG.53(b), the detail of big-hit interval command processing (S3008) is demonstrated. FIG.53(b) is a flowchart which shows a jackpot interval command process (S3008). This jackpot interval command process (S3008) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot interval command process, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and based on the jackpot interval display data table thus set, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the big hit interval command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the process of S3007, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S3007: No), the process of S3008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3009. In the process of S3009, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3009), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S3009: Yes), the jackpot ending command process is executed. (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command process (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending command process (S3010). This jackpot ending command process (S3010) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot ending command process, first, a jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3501). Thereafter, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3502). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the big hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3009 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S3009: No), the process of S3010 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3011. In the process of S3011, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small winning opening command for display (S3011), and if there is a small winning opening command for display (S3011: Yes), a small winning opening command The process is executed (S3012), and the process proceeds to S3013.

Here, with reference to FIG.54(b), the detail of a small hit opening command process (S3012) is demonstrated. FIG.54(b) is a flowchart which shows a small hit opening command process (S3012). This small winning opening command processing (S3012) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small winning opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning opening command process, first, the small winning opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the small winning opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and based on the set small winning opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3011 that there is no display small winning opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3011: No), the process of S3012 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3013. In the process of S3013, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting ending command for display (S3013), and if there is a small hitting ending command for display (S3013: Yes), a small hitting ending command The process is executed (S3014), and the process proceeds to S3015.

Here, with reference to Drawing 55 (a), the details of small hit ending command processing (S3014) are explained. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the small winning ending command process (S3014). This small hit ending command process (S3014) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning ending command process, first, the small winning ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702). Then, based on the set small winning ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the small hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3013 that there is no display small winning ending command in the unprocessed new commands (S3013: No), the process of S3014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3015. In the process of S3015, it is determined whether or not there is a V-pass command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3015), and if there is a V-pass command for display (S3015: Yes), V-pass command processing is executed. (S3016), and the process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55(b), the details of the V passage command processing (S3016) will be described. S3015 is a flow chart showing V passing command processing (S3016). This V passing command processing (S3016) is for executing processing corresponding to the V passing command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V passing command processing, first, the V passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the V passing command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3015 that there is no display V passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S3015: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the process of S2708, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pseudo start command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2710). If there is a pseudo start command (S2710: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation display process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the pseudo-variation display processing (S2711) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing pseudo-variation display processing. This pseudo-variation display process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the display pseudo-start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pseudo-variation display process, first, a pseudo-display data table of pseudo-variation patterns based on the stop type corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902). Then, based on the set pseudo display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the winning related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the processing of S2710, if it is determined that there is no display pseudo start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2712). If there is an image change command (S2712: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the back image change command process (S2713) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing (S2713), first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S4001). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, back face B), the back face image discrimination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the back face image change command is turned on, and the other back faces are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

In the task processing (S2604), if it is specified to display either back face A or back face B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination set in S4002 is performed. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the lapse of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2712, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2714). Otherwise (S2714: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the error command processing (S2715) will now be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no error command (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2716), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

In the process of S2701, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes ), the processing of S2702 to S2716 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2701 to S2716 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S2608) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 50(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2801. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2802, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, details of the display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4202), S4203-S4204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4301).

In task processing (S2604), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4204), or if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4203: No), then the process proceeds to S4205.

In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59(b) is a flow chart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4405), and this process ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In task processing, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S4206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4209: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4215), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2604), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S4215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is replaced with the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4218). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S4216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4216: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S2609) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the image of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image has ended. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the details of the transfer setting process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S4502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4501, that is, if it is turned off (S4501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4502).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S4601). S4601: Yes), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4602). In the processing of S4602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4602 that the transfer process has not ended (S4602: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4602: Yes), the process proceeds to S4603. Also, as a result of the processing of S4601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4601: No), the process proceeds to S4603.

In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S4603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S4603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4605), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2608 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61) (see S4501: No in FIG. 60A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2603) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S4701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4703), furthermore, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Also, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4702: No), the processes of S4703 and S4704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4706).

In the process of S4706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4706 that the transfer process has not ended (S4706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4706: Yes), the process proceeds to S4707. Also, as a result of the process of S4705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4705: No), the process proceeds to S4707.

In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4707). is turned off (S4708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S4713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S4709).

If the back image change flag is on (S4709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

In the process of S4709, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4709, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713). The determination in the process of S4713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4713 (S4713: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4713 (S4713: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S4714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S4715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the drawing process (S2606), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4801). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2604), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S4802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 48(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) that allows the ball to win a prize ), in which a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) that grants a privilege to the player when the ball passes through the variable ball entry means, a guidance state in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and a state in which the ball is difficult to pass through. A guide means (V-gate 650d) is provided which can be varied at predetermined intervals to and from the regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is won consecutively, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results has a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. there is

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the specific lottery result by himself when the player wins the specific lottery result in succession. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to winning the lottery result.

In the above-described embodiment, when a specific lottery result (small hit A) is won continuously, that is, when a specific lottery result is consecutively won, the ball moves through the specific area. A small winning game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass has been shown to be easily executed, but if it is a configuration that makes it easier to execute an advantageous privilege game by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, in the present embodiment Configurations other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, a configuration may be used in which an advantageous privilege game is likely to be executed when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order. In addition, as a predetermined order, a predetermined order such as a case where a specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is consecutively won multiple times, or a case where a specific lottery result and a loss are alternately repeated. includes winning multiple times in a particular lottery result. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special pattern is lost as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility that it will become easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Furthermore, in the case of winning consecutive small wins, the total time of the playing time of the small win game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small win among the consecutive small wins is the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operating cycle.

As a result, when small wins occur successively, the successive small wins do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operating cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small winning game and the variation time of the second special figure variation display among the continuous small winnings is the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d In contrast, the V gate 650d is configured to differ by at least the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state.

As a result, when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the V gate 650d in the second small winning game is V The timing of causing the ball to flow down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the induced state, and when the player wins the small winning game continuously, the player wins the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than in the case where the game is played, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play the game due to consecutive small winnings.

As for the time to be differentiated, it is desirable to make the difference equal to or longer than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induced state with respect to the integral multiple of the operating cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. . As such a configuration, for example, if the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is set to be shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second), By winning a small prize consecutively for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to make a difference of one operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than the case of winning a single small win when the small win is won in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is not in an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small winning game, the time (1.5 seconds minute) When the different small winning game continues a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is more than one cycle of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d It is possible to vary the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the successively won small wins is executed, the successively won small wins are awarded to the player. It is configured to provide an advantageous game state for As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and to improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, it is shown that the number of reserved balls is seven as the predetermined condition, but other conditions may be set, and the number of reserved balls that satisfy the predetermined condition may be changed. In addition, requirements other than the number of held balls may be set as the predetermined condition. For example, it may be set as the predetermined condition that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the predetermined lottery result and the game state is different from the normal game state. Alternatively, it may be determined as a predetermined condition that it is within a predetermined period of time (for example, a period of time until the special symbols are changed 50 times) after the end of a specific game state such as a jackpot game.

Even with such a configuration, the player will be motivated to play the game so as to satisfy the predetermined conditions, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won continuously, a small hit that can (easily) pass through a specific area is determined, and based on the determination result, a continuous small hit period And a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of a possible (easy) small win, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small wins executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are consecutive, it is possible to provide a game state more advantageous than the case where the small wins are executed alone. , based on the fact that the small win is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured so as to be able to provide a game state more advantageous than when the small win is executed alone.

For example, based on the fact that a small win is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times, which is the upper limit number to be held and stored), a game state that is more advantageous than the case where a small win is executed alone is established. It may be configured so that it can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings.

Also, based on the fact that small wins are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, small wins and losses are executed alternately), it is more advantageous than the case where small wins are executed independently game state can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order by combining small hits and losses, it is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player even when the result is a loss as a result of lottery of special symbols a plurality of times. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, based on the fact that small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, small hits and losses are alternately executed), it is more advantageous than the case where small hits are executed alone game state can be provided, similar to the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the loss A special fluctuation time may be set to , and the timing at which a plurality of small wins are executed and the opening timing of the guidance means may be made different. As a result, even if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, there remains a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state will be provided, aside from the result of the lottery of the special symbols. effective.

In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbols corresponding to the small win and the special variation of the special symbols corresponding to the loss. As a result, when the small hits are consecutive and when the small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, when the small hits are alternately executed), special special effects during the continuous production It is possible to execute the same effect as the symbol variation effect, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the variation pattern selection table 202c for loss referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 5.5 seconds when the number of entering balls retained and stored is 5 to 6. A special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for outliers) is defined. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of entered balls that are retained and stored decreases from 7 to 6 to 5, special wins are made in the order of small win A (first time) → miss → small win A (second time). When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the fluctuation display of the loss (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small win A (5.5 seconds) ) After that, a small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is different from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A of the V gate 650d. The timing is different by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds) from the operating cycle.

In the above-described example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is shown to be unified between the case of the lottery result of the special symbol and the case of the small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of the loss (Variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time that is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds). By doing so, even if the deviation variation is executed during the small hit as in the above example, the time required for the deviation variation to change the deviation (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) can be unified with Therefore, the same continuous performance time can be secured in the case where the lottery results of the special symbols are in the order of small win A→loss→small win A and the case where the small win A is won three times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by standardizing the continuous effects.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous performance is a small win or a loss, the player can have expectations until the end of the continuous performance. There is

As mentioned above, the illustrated configuration shows a case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out, but it is not limited to it. It may be a small hit (small hit B to C) where B is not set. In this case, it is preferable to unify the small winning game times of the small winnings B to C with the small winning A to achieve commonality of the continuous effect.

Further, in this embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hit is executed continuously (when the small hit is executed a plurality of times), the small hit is made independently. Although it is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, other configurations may be used. It is also possible to change the opening period and the opening timing, change the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (induction means), and change the operation timing of the stopper 650c.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small wins is a small win that can pass V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small wins can pass through the V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. . Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in the first embodiment.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the crew member 660, and during the fluctuation period of the normal design, the speed of flowing down (the speed of moving vertically downward in the game area) is delayed to make it easy to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a in accordance with the period during which the normal pattern wins. In the second embodiment, a rotation holding device 690 is arranged below the through gate 67 instead of the crew member 660 . Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotation holding member 690 includes a rotating portion 690c arranged at a position where a first recessed portion 690a and a second recessed portion 690b which can enter a game ball face each other via a central axis 690z, and the rotating portion 690c from both left and right sides. Side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged at positions rotatable in a state in which a game ball enters (holds) the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged with openings so that game balls can enter the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c from above. Further, the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are not arranged below the rotating portion 690c, and when the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c is in the lower position, the ball is entered. It is possible to make the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entrance 64a.

The rotating portion 690a is configured to rotate clockwise in a front view by a rotating motor (not shown) by a rotating shaft 690z. In this case, it is configured at a speed of one rotation in 20 seconds, and when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b, the normal symbol hit variation time is 10 seconds. Therefore, it is configured to be discharged from below in accordance with the timing. As in the first embodiment, the ejected game ball collides with the nail KG, is delayed in flowing down, is sorted to the right or left of the nail KG, and enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is configured. In this embodiment, when the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c does not face upward, the ball flows downward without entering the ball. It may be configured to be held by the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 and wait until the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b rotates upward. Further, two recesses into which the game ball can enter may be further provided to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the recess and enters the rotating part 690c. Also, a plurality of rotation holding members 690 similar to those of the second embodiment may be arranged to hold a plurality of game balls in the game area, thereby delaying the downflow.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-67. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a starting gate 680 is arranged between the croon member 660 and the first ball-entering device 64 (above the nail KG), unlike the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start gate 680 is a starting switch for starting a normal symbol winning game when the normal symbol winning is achieved. The judgment result of the normal design is winning, and when the variation time passes and the game ball is passed through the start gate 680 after the winning design is stopped and displayed, the winning game of the normal design is started. In addition, since the winning game of normal symbols to be started is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

0.5 seconds after passing through the start gate 680, the opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 is opened to allow the ball to enter the first ball-entering port 64a. The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 680 collides with the nail KG, is distributed in the lateral direction of the nail KG, and flows down to the first ball entering device 64 . The period required from passing through the start gate 680 to being guided to the first ball-entering device 64 is approximately 0.6 seconds to 1 second, and is the period during which the first ball-entering device 64 is in the open state. , so that the game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 can easily enter the first ball entrance 64a.

In the present embodiment, the nail KG is arranged below the start gate 680 so as to delay the opening of the first ball entrance 64a. A rotation holding member, a clown member, or the like as in the second embodiment may be arranged, or the game ball may be configured to flow down while contacting a rubber member or the like that reduces the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the opening period of the normal symbol winning game may be set as long as 5 seconds, and a delay member may be arranged in accordance with the period.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a normal symbol hit flag 203i is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol winning flag 203i is a flag indicating that the right to start a normal symbol winning game has been granted. When the game ball is passed through the start gate 680 after the normal symbol winning flag 203i is set to ON, the normal symbol winning game is started. It should be noted that this normal symbol per flag 203i is normal symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see FIG. 66), which is one process in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, in the process of S527 , It is set to ON when the normal pattern hit variation period ends. In addition, in the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 of the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is the normal symbol. The difference is that it is changed to the variation process 2 (see FIG. 66). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process 2 (S111). In the normal symbol variation process 2 (S111) in the third embodiment, the difference is that the processes of S519 and S521 are deleted and the process of S527 is added to the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 24). do. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of S519 and the processing of S521 (see FIG. 24) are processing for setting the opening of the first ball entrance device 64 (setting a winning game with normal symbols). Since the winning of the normal symbols is started when passing through, it is deleted and set so as to be set when passing through the start gate 680 (see S1458 and S1460 in FIG. 67). In the process of S527, the normal symbol winning flag 203i is set to ON, and when the game ball passes through the start gate 680, the normal symbol winning game is started. In addition, the process of S527 is a case where it is determined that the normal symbol variation time set in the process of S522 has passed, and further, it is determined that the lottery result is a hit in the process of S524. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 (S1020), which is one process in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (S1020). The main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is that the electric accessary product opening/closing processing (S1006) in the main processing (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment is the electric accessary product opening/closing processing 2. (S1020) is different. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 67), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag 203i is ON (S1451). When the normal symbol hit flag 203i is off (S1451: No), whether the electric accessory (corresponding to the opening and closing door of the first ball entry device 64) is in the opening and closing operation (that is, opening or closing to opening operation) (S1452). When the electric accessory is in operation (S1452: Yes), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (S1453). When it is determined that the opening time has passed (S1453: Yes), the opening/closing operation corresponding to the electric accessory is set (S1454). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined No in the processing of S1452 and S1453, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1451, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit flag 203i is ON (S1451: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 680 (S1455). If it is determined that the starting gate 680 has not been passed (S1455: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that the start gate 680 is passed (S1455: Yes), the normal symbol per flag 203i is set to ON (S1456), and the time saving medium counter 203d is 1 or more, That is, it is determined whether or not it is during working hours (S1457). When it is determined that it is during the time saving (S1457: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the jackpot game (S1458). If the jackpot is not in progress, the normal symbol winning period is set to 2 seconds, and the interval is set to 2 times at 1 second (S1459). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1457, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S1457: No), or when it is determined in the process of S1458 that it is during the special symbol jackpot game, the open period is once every 2 seconds. set to Note that the period until opening is started (opening period) is set to 0.5 seconds regardless of the state.

In this way, since the winning of normal symbols is started when it passes through the start gate 680, the first ball entrance 64 can be opened even to the player who has stopped shooting the game balls during the fluctuation of the normal symbols. It is possible to suppress missing the opportunity to enter the ball into the ball and facilitate playing the game.

In addition, in the example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the start gate 680 is arranged at a position where the game ball can easily pass without providing the clown member 660 or the like, and the game ball is fired early. may be configured to pass through.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 86. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured not to store reserved balls for special symbols, but the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to store reserved balls for special symbols. This is the difference from the first embodiment. Elements and configurations that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, an example of the display contents of the fusion symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the reserved ball of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment is stored will be described. . FIG. 69 shows the timing (period) at which each variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed when three normal symbol reserved balls are stored and one special symbol reserved ball is stored, It is the timing chart which showed the timing (period) to which a fused design fluctuates correspondingly and is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, in synchronism with the variation start timing of normal symbols, variable display of fusion symbols is started (see FIG. 6(a)). As shown in the first embodiment, in the case of a normal pattern hit, the fusion pattern is displayed in a reach display mode (see FIG. 6(b)), and the normal pattern hit game execution period (normal pattern hit period ), as shown in FIG. 7(a), the ready-to-win display mode is displayed during the period in which the first ball entrance 64a is open, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, special Synchronously with the start of the variable display of the symbols, the display mode of super reach is displayed with the fusion symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 69, two game balls are entered into the first ball entrance 64a during the winning period of normal symbols in which the first ball entrance 64a is open, and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. It shows an example when During the special symbol variation display period (during special symbol variation A), the normal symbol hit period ends, and among the normal symbol retention balls, the variation display corresponding to the first ball is the special symbol variation display. It is started during the period being performed (the period during which special figure variation A is being performed). In this case, the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed only in the blinking display portion, and the auxiliary normal symbol is variably displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, even after the variation period of the special symbol ends five seconds before the start of the variation and the end timing of the variation display, the fusion symbol is simulated. It is configured to determine whether to perform variable display (effect such as shaking). On the other hand, in the present fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation at the start of the variation of the special symbol and at the end of the variation display. In the fourth embodiment, the condition for pseudo-fluctuation of the fusion symbol is limited to the case where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, and the pseudo-variation is executed when the suspension of the special symbol is stored. It is configured so that it cannot be By configuring in this way, the variation of the fusion design corresponding to the special design (variation of the fusion design showing the lottery result of the special design) can be executed preferentially, and is a direct opportunity to start the jackpot game. The notification corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol can be performed by the fusion symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the first game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, since the reserved ball with the special symbol is not yet stored, the special symbol fluctuates. At the variation timing at the start (when the variation of the special figure variation A starts), after the variation, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, when the lottery result in the variation of the special symbol (special symbol variation A) is out, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, and the normal symbol is hit within 2 reservations. If the hold that becomes is stored, the execution of pseudo variation is set (as a reservation set after the end of the special symbol variation time). By constructing in this way, if the reserved balls that will win the normal symbols are stored in the second reserve, the first ball entrance 64a will be immediately opened and the special symbols will be opened even after the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols. Even if the variation of is started (timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a), the previous variation of the fusion symbol is continuously executed in the pseudo variation, so in connection with the variation, next The fusion pattern is varied in synchronism with the started special pattern variation to reduce the number of variations of the fusion pattern for notifying the result of the winning lottery, thereby making the player think that the winning probability is high. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the start of the special symbol variation (at the start of the special symbol variation B), no winning retention is stored in the 2 retentions of the normal symbols, so the pseudo variation is not set. At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special symbol stops (the timing when the fluctuation period of the special fluctuation B has passed), it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo fluctuation. In addition to the execution of the determination similar to that at the start of variation, in a state in which the reserved ball of the special design is not stored, if the holding to be a win is not stored in the 2 holdings of the normal design, the special design. It is discriminated whether or not the variation of the normal symbol is continued even after the is stopped, and when it is continuously performed, the pseudo variation of the fused symbol is set until the timing when the variation is finished. In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the special figure variation A stops varying, the held ball corresponding to the special figure variation B is stored, so the pseudo variation is not set and the fusion symbol is also displayed in the reach display mode. The medium pattern is stop-displayed in a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern (left and right stop patterns), and the player is notified that the lottery result is lost.

When the variation of the special figure variation A stops, the variation display of the fusion symbol that has been stop-displayed is started in synchronization with the start of the variation of the special figure variation B. When the fusion pattern starts to change, each pattern row is scrolled in the vertical direction at a low speed (speed at which each pattern is visible), and then scrolled at high speed (at a speed at which each pattern is not visible). be. When the special symbols start to fluctuate, it is determined whether or not to set a pseudo-fluctuation in the same manner as in the special fluctuation A. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the special figure fluctuation B starts to fluctuate, the reserved ball of the special pattern is not stored, but the held ball that will be hit within the two reservations of the normal symbol is not stored. Therefore, no pseudo-variation is set.

In the fluctuation display of the fusion design corresponding to the special figure fluctuation A, it is displayed from the start of super reach (see FIG. 7 (b)), but in the fluctuation display of the fusion design corresponding to the special figure fluctuation B, the fusion design is stopped. As described above, the variable display is started from the state, and after the ready-to-win display is displayed, a specific change pattern is set in which the super reach display mode is displayed. In this case, since the special symbol variation time is determined on the main controller 110 side, the variation pattern selection table 222a of the voice ramp control device 113 includes whether the special symbol variation is a variation executed by the ball on hold. The fluctuation pattern of the fusion symbol in which the start of super reach is executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time that can be selected in correspondence with whether or not (selected when it starts), and the fusion pattern starts to fluctuate from the state in which it is stopped, and the fluctuation pattern of the fusion pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result through the reach display mode is set. It is

By configuring in this way, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts to fluctuate due to the holding ball, and when the fluctuation starts at the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64a, the fusion that has been performed so far It is possible to variably display corresponding fused patterns according to the varying state of the patterns (difference between being displayed in a ready-to-win state and being displayed in a stopped state), thereby suppressing the inconvenience of giving a player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the timing at which the fusion pattern starts to change can be matched with the timing at which the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, or the timing at which the special pattern starts to fluctuate. Since it is possible to match the timing to stop the variation of the normal symbols or to match the timing to stop the variation of the special symbols, the player can be interested in the variation display of the fusion symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variation contents of the fusion symbol in the case where the holding balls that will win in the two holdings of the normal symbols are stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the fusion symbol in the case where the holding balls that will hit in the two holdings of the normal symbols are stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol (at the start of the variation of the special symbol variation C). be. In the example shown in FIG. 70, three held balls are stored in the normal symbol, and the second held ball stored is stored as a winning ball. The variation of the normal symbol during the variation (during the variation of the special figure variation C) is a hit, and when the first ball entrance 64a is opened, two game balls enter the first ball entrance 64a, It is an example showing the variation mode of the fusion symbol in the case where one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. At the start of the variation of the special figure variation C, the retained ball that will be hit in the 2 retentions of the normal symbols is stored, and at the start of the variation (at the start of the variation of the special figure variation C), the retained ball of the special symbol is still stored. (Even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a continuously, before the game ball that entered later is discriminated, the special symbol variation start setting process is performed. Executed), so after the end of the special figure fluctuation C, a maximum of 30 seconds of pseudo fluctuation is set to be executed in the fusion design. On the other hand, after the special symbol fluctuation start setting is done (pseudo fluctuation start setting (pseudo setting flag 223h includes the process of turning on)), the special symbol corresponding to the special figure fluctuation D from the main controller 110 When the hold command is received, the set pseudo fluctuation start setting is canceled (the process of setting the pseudo setting flag 223h to off) is executed.

In the variation of the fusion pattern corresponding to the special figure variation C, the display mode from the start of the super reach is displayed in the fusion design in the same manner as the special figure variation A explained in FIG. At the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation C passes (the fluctuation period ends), the fluctuation display of the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed. Since the lottery result of the special figure variation C shows an example in which the result is lost, the fusion pattern is stopped and displayed in the medium pattern row, which is different from the ready-to-win pattern indicating that the lottery result is lost. (See FIG. 8(a)). Judgment as to whether the pseudo-variation is performed at the end timing of the variation time of the special figure variation C is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. No settings are executed.

Next, based on the variation start timing of the special figure variation D, determination is performed whether to set the pseudo variation, and in the example shown in FIG. Since the holding ball is stored, it is set so that the pseudo variation of maximum 30 seconds is executed after the end of the special figure variation D. In this case, since the winning game corresponding to the holding 2 of the normal design is executed in the fluctuation period (including the pseudo fluctuation period) of the fusion design corresponding to the special design fluctuation D, the third design is displayed in the fluctuation period of the fusion design. The device 81 is set to display a notice display mode for notifying in advance that a normal symbol winning game will be executed (open notice is set). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(b), 3 seconds before the winning game of the normal symbol, the characters "Fire the game ball and hold the charge chance!" ) is set to be displayed in the front layer than ). The advance notice display mode shown in FIG. 72(b) is a display mode executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, and notifies that the number of held balls will increase when game balls are shot. In addition, after the special symbol variation period is over, during the period in which the pseudo variation is being executed (the state in which there is no special symbol reserved ball), game balls are shot as shown in FIG. 72(a). Then, as a notice display mode indicating that the fused pattern will change again, a display mode of "shoot game ball and change again!!" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70, when the advance notice display mode is set over the period from the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol to the pseudo fluctuation period, the notice display mode is switched and displayed at the timing of the pseudo fluctuation. It is

By constructing in this way, even for a player who has stopped shooting game balls during the fluctuation period of the fusion pattern, the normal pattern wins and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is being executed, it is set so as to display the notice display mode when the normal symbol hits. If the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (four in this embodiment), the advance notice display mode may not be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the problem of causing the player to wastefully shoot the game ball and thus impairing the profit.

In this embodiment, the notice display mode is switched between the special symbol fluctuation period and the stop period. It may be configured to switch the advance notice display mode by and. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that it is a period in which the game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64a, so that the player can enter the first ball entrance 64a. can raise expectations for

At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation D ends, it is determined whether to execute the setting of the pseudo fluctuation, and since the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is already executed at the start of the fluctuation, up to 30 based on the setting A second pseudo-variation (see FIG. 8(b)) is performed. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64a, the re-variation of the fusion symbol is started based on the new start of variation of the special symbol. be. On the other hand, even if the opening period of the normal symbol (including the ball sweeping period, which is the period from when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a until it is detected by the detection switch) ends, the first ball entrance 64a When the game ball is not detected by the detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered, the pseudo fluctuation (variation display) of the fusion symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display. It should be noted that, similar to the special figure variation B, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation D starts scrolling from the state where the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed, and goes through the reach display form, and then the super reach display form. is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example of super reach is explained for the variable display of special symbols. It may be configured in any manner.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and when the reserved ball is not stored, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is generated. Since it is configured to switch and set the variation mode in the case where the variation (scroll display) is switched to the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol and displayed, the fusion symbol starts the variation display. A series of effects until notifying whether or not it becomes a hit (judgment result of a special pattern) can be executed in the same flow every time (scroll display starts from the stop state of the fusion pattern, and through the reach display mode , The middle pattern that is the same as the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and the winning is announced with a double eye). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, when the reserved ball of the special pattern is stored, if the lottery result for the variation is out, the fusion pattern is variably displayed over the fluctuation period of the special pattern stored in the reserved ball. It may be configured to produce a variable display of 1. By constructing in this way, the number of times the game is stopped due to the failure of the fusion pattern can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency of being notified of winning is higher than the actual probability of winning.

In addition, it may be constructed such that one variation of the fusion symbol is performed over a period in which a plurality of continuous variation displays of the normal symbols are performed. By constructing in this way, by connecting the fluctuation time up to the ball of the winning normal pattern and making it within one fluctuation of the fusion pattern, the frequency of stopping due to the loss of the fusion pattern can be reduced. Furthermore, it may be constructed so that the variation time corresponding to the deviation of the normal symbol can be shortened so that a plurality of deviation variations can be completed in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72, display modes displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72(a) is a diagram showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is a normal symbol display area Ds4 below the normal symbol display area Ds1 with respect to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. However, the special figure reservation real number display area Ds5 is added to the lower part of the special symbol display area Ds2, and the normal figure reservation number display area Ds3 is changed to the fusion reservation number display area Ds6, which is different from the first embodiment do. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

The normal pattern reserved actual number display region Ds4 is a display region in which a notification mode indicating the reserved number of normal symbols is displayed. In this embodiment, "a" if the number of reservations is 0, "b" if the number of reservations is 1, "c" if the number of reservations is 2, and the number of reservations is It is configured so that "d" is displayed when the number is 3, and "e" is displayed when the number of reserved items is 4 (see FIG. 71(b)). In this way, the symbols are displayed so that the actual reserved number of normal symbols is difficult for the player to understand at a glance. By configuring in this way, in the present embodiment, by executing pseudo-variation etc., there may be cases where it is different from the pending number displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6 described later, but it is different This can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player can play while recognizing the reserved number displayed in the merged reserved number display area Ds6 as the actual reserved number.

Further, in the special figure real reserved number display area Ds5, the reserved number of special symbols is displayed. In the display shown here, the number of pending figures is reported in the same display form as that displayed in the above-described normal figure pending actual number display area Ds4. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the actual number of reserved special symbols, and the fused symbols fluctuating by scrolling display is either a variable display corresponding to the normal symbols, or a special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult to understand whether the variable display corresponds to the pattern. Therefore, the player can concentrate only on the result notified by the fusion pattern, and can play the game without understanding the complicated game characteristics.

Here, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 will be described with reference to FIG. 71(b). Only based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the suspension is newly stored, the "black circle" pattern is displayed in the fusion suspension number display area Ds6, and the right (suspension) to variably display the fusion pattern is granted. You will be notified that it is stored. Up to four 'black circle' patterns can be displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and it is structured so as to notify that the number of times of reservation in which the fusion pattern fluctuates is four times. In the state where the "black circle" pattern is displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, that is, in the state where the reservation of the normal pattern is stored, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the fluctuation of the special pattern. Then, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the reserved symbol of the first stored reserved symbol (the reserved symbol with the earliest change order) is changed as shown in FIG. 71(b). displayed (eg, red, etc.). By configuring in this way, after the special symbol during variation stops varying, the suspended special symbol variation is started, but the suspended symbol displayed at that timing is digested (the displayed front row The reserved pattern can be erased, and the display position of the reserved pattern displayed after the next can be slid and displayed. In addition, when the reserved pattern that has already been changed and displayed is displayed, the reserved pattern that is displayed in the non-variable state ("black circle" pattern) that is displayed next is changed and displayed. . If there is no reserved pattern to be displayed next, a newly changed reserved pattern is displayed. Similarly, when the reserve pattern is not displayed in the fusion reserve number display area Ds6 and the reserve of the special pattern is stored, the newly variable reserve pattern is similarly displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to update (digest) and display the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 in accordance with the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, thereby suppressing the player's sense of incongruity. We can provide a game that has been done. Furthermore, when a reserved ball is stored as a special symbol, the colors of the reserved symbols are displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation for a big win. In this embodiment, since the lottery probability of winning the special symbol is set higher than the probability of winning the normal symbol, the actual expectation of the big winning is also high. In this embodiment, the colors of the reserved symbols are configured to be variable. is high, blue is low, etc.).

In addition, by configuring in this way, there is a difference between the actual reserved number of normal symbols and the reserved number displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, but when the difference occurs, the normal pattern deviation fluctuation Pseudo-continuous variation accompanied by pseudo-stop is executed by the variation of the fused symbols variably displayed corresponding to, and the suspended symbols displayed in the fusion-held number display area Ds6 are digested at the timing of re-fluctuation after the pseudo-stop timing. By doing so, it is possible to match the difference in the number of reserved items.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of reservations displayed in the fusion reservation number display area Ds6 was set to a maximum of 4, but not limited to that, the actual normal symbol as the upper limit number of 8, each reservation number of special symbols It may be configured to correspond and notify. In this case, the reserved symbols in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 displayed at the timing when the special symbols fluctuate and the timing when the normal symbols start to fluctuate may be updated.

FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), as described above, are diagrams showing an example of the advance notice display mode in the case where the normal symbol wins during the special symbol fluctuation period (including the pseudo-fluctuation period). Since it is as described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Note that the differences in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 73(b). Since other points are the same as in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j and a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k are added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2. , stop type selection counter C3, and each value of small hit type counter CS3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area 203a, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, determination such as special symbol lottery is performed. .

When data is shifted from the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3, CS3 is obtained according to the starting winning, those values are included. A special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 . When the special figure winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113, from the special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command), each counter C1 ~ C3, Each value of CS3 is extracted and stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k of the RAM 223 as special figure winning information.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is a variable display of a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of variable display) up to 4 times. The value N of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set to zero as an initial value, and the maximum value is obtained each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the number of special symbol reserved balls increases. 1 is added up to 4 (see S424 in FIG. 76), and 1 is subtracted each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 75).

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), if the value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variation display in the special symbol N) is less than 4, the first random number Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j (Fig. 76 of S426). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 4 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), nothing is newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j. (S423 in FIG. 76: No).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S224 in FIG. 75 and S425 in FIG. 76). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed, the special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls itself in the variable display. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special figure pending ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the special figure reservation ball number command to be received next.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 of the reserved number of special figures every time the number of reserved balls changes. Send a command for the number of pending pitches for display. The display control device 114 displays the special figure reserved ball number design in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls of the special figure notified by this display reserved ball number command. indicate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73(b), the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73(b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a special figure winning information storage area 223k, a special figure reservation ball number counter 223m, a special figure pseudo fluctuation flag 223p and a special figure pseudo setting A flag 223q has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure winning information storage area 223k has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the And from each value of the small win type counter CS3, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, big win or small win type in case of big win or small win, variation pattern) Is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by the special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command) be notified.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the special figure winning information command is received, various information notified by the special figure winning information command (win or not, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, variation pattern) It is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110, is a special symbol fluctuation effect (variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the special figure reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, is designed to manage

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. When it is done, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k after addition or subtraction.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110 from the special figure reserved ball number command. Then, it is stored in the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m (see S1736 in FIG. 81). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the special figure reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is updated, the special symbol reservation ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203k.

The value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is used for the display of the special figure reserved ball number design in the third design display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the special figure reserved ball number command in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m, and the special figure reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223m, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 The number of reserved balls Drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the special symbol reservation real number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of special symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the illustration and description of the different control processing will be provided.

Timer interrupt processing 2 executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interrupt process 2. As shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process 2 (FIG. 74), the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) in contrast to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The difference is that the starting winning process (S105) is added after the second variation process. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. The details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S120). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 75, S104) in the fourth embodiment, the processing of S203 to S204 is the processing of S221 to S225 in contrast to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 25, S104) in the first embodiment. The difference is that it has been changed to As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203k (number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired ( S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is greater than 0 (S222), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is not 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S223), and changed by calculation. A special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set (S224). The special figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k from the special figure reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special figure reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special symbol reserved ball number command by the processing of S224, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203j are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 74) to determine whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning). Secondly, it is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S421: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is obtained (S422). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64a (S421: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64a, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4. Otherwise (S423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64a (S421: Yes) and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203k is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k from the special figure reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special figure reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special figure pending ball number command by the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second Each value of the hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203 (S426). . In addition, in the process of S426, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S427 is executed.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S426 is determined to be a big win when the variation starts. Whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state is discriminated from the judgment result of the reserved balls stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, and the judgment is made. Performed in advance (read-ahead determination of pass/fail determination results). In the process of S427, not only the success/failure determination result but also the stop type and variation pattern are discriminated and stored in the corresponding reserve area of the special symbol reserve ball storage area 203j.

In the process of S427, when it is determined that the game is a big win (S427: Yes), a big win prize information command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S428). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is super reach, the corresponding jackpot prize information command is set. On the other hand, in the process of S427, when it is determined that it is lost (S427: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S429). In the process of S429, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super ready-to-win (S429: Yes), a win-win winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S430). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern different from the super ready-to-win (S429: No), a missed winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S431). The winning information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can identify the type of variation pattern to be selected.

When the winning information command is set, it is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. FIG. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the illustration and description of the different control processing will be provided.

Main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process 2. As shown in FIG. In main processing 2 (FIG. 77), command determination processing (S1612) is changed to command determination processing 2 (S1620) in contrast to main processing (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and variable display setting processing (S1613) is changed to command determination processing 2 (S1620). It is different in that it is changed to the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1630) and the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614) is changed to the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of command determination process 2 (S1620), change display setting process 2 (S1630), and pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1620) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 2 (S1620). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S1620) in the fourth embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 40, S1612) in the first embodiment in that the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708) is the pseudo fluctuation start setting process. 2 (S1720), the processing of S1709 to S1711 is changed to the processing of S1729 to S1730, and the processing of S1715 to S1716 is changed to the processing of S1731 to S1732. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1707, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 is executed (S1720), and this process ends. This pseudo-fluctuation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. (Refer to FIG. 8(b)) is executed by the fusion symbol.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S1720) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S2120 is added to the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment, and S2120 and S2107 The difference is that the process of S2102 is executed after the process of . As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (that is, if the pseudo fluctuation setting is not executed) (S2101: No), the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop is executed ( S2120), this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 80, the pseudo setting processing at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120). In the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (FIG. 80, S2120), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to stop fluctuation is out of the special symbol (S2121). If it is determined that the special symbol is hit (S2121: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined to be out of the special symbol (S2121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the number of special symbols reserved balls, that is, the value of the number of special symbols reserved balls counter 223m is 0 (S2122 ).

In the processing of S2122, if the value of the number of special figure reserved balls is not 0, that is, if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S2122: No), this processing ends as it is. Here, in this embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special design is stored, the variation of the special design is started continuously after the special design is stopped, so there is no need to execute the pseudo variation. , setting of pseudo fluctuations, etc. are not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number of special figure reserved balls is 0 (S2122: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 reserved (S2123). If it is determined that there is a hit within the next two reservations of the normal symbols (S2123: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2124). Next, the process proceeds to S2127. In this way, in a state where there is no reserved ball of the special design, if the result of determination of whether the special design to be stopped is also out, the fusion design will also be stopped in a mode of notifying the loss, but two of the normal symbols will be stopped. When there is a win in the reserve, until then, by extending the fixed stop in the losing mode with a pseudo-variation, it is possible to integrate and display the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol. . As a result, the frequency of stopped display due to the deviation of the notification result of the fusion symbol can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next two reservations of the normal symbols (S2123: No), it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbols that stop after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed. (S2125). Here, the period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped later than the timing when the variation of the special symbols is stopped is the variation of the currently varying normal symbols than the variation of the special symbols that are performing the variation. It is a period in which it can be discriminated that the fluctuation of the normal pattern which starts to fluctuate anew during the fluctuation of the special pattern continues to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special pattern which is currently fluctuating is stopped.

In the processing of S2125, when it is determined that the period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is not executed (S2125: No), this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbol that stops after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol is executed (S2125: Yes), the pseudo variation setting process of the first embodiment (Fig. 45 , S1614), so that the variation of the normal symbol during execution and the stop timing of the pseudo variation are coincident, the variation of the normal symbol is changed after the variation of the special symbol being executed is completed. t1 (see FIG. 10(a)) is set as the differential seconds until the end of (S2212). Next, the process proceeds to S2127.

In the process of S2127, the value of the production counter 223g is acquired (S2127), and the production type (continuous production or out of production, fluctuation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired production counter 223g value Based on, a pseudo variation pattern is selected corresponding to the effect type from the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18(b)) (S2128). Then, a display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2129). This display pseudo-fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-fluctuation pattern. After that, the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON (S2130), and the process is terminated. In the case of continuation, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the off pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is set by processing into the production.

Thus, in the present embodiment, by combining the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 and displaying them together with the fusion symbol, the complicated game property is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. can be done. Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced in flow speed upstream of the first ball entrance 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol is hit by the crew member 660, so that the game ball is played by the shooting device. It is configured to increase the chances of winning the first ball entrance 65a even during the period when the ball is not launched.

Further, when the special symbol deviation variation is executed, the determination result in the two retentions of the normal symbols is discriminated, and if the winning ball is stored, the period is longer than the variation ends. Since the judgment result of being out is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special pattern can be connected with the variation of the fused pattern of one variation by the success of the next normal pattern, and can be produced.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description continues. After the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120) is executed, the process of S2102 is executed. Here, when the special symbols are stopped and pseudo-variation is performed, a command indicating that the pseudo-variation is executed, and when the fusion symbols are stopped and displayed without pseudo-variation, the fusion symbols are stopped and displayed. Each command shown is set as a display stop command (S2102). After that, this process ends.

Next, return to FIG. 78 and continue the description. In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command of the general pattern (normal pattern) or special pattern (special pattern) has been received ( S1729). When it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls of normal or special is received (S1729: Yes), the command for the number of reserved balls is received (S1730). In the reserved ball number command reception process (S1730), when a command indicating the reserved ball number of a normal pattern or a special pattern is received, the process of updating and storing the reserved ball number and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 A process of setting the display of each actual reserved number to be displayed by updating it to the number corresponding to the command, a process of instructing the display of the reserved pattern to be displayed in the fusion reserved number display area, etc. are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the pending pitch number command reception process (S1730) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this pending pitch command reception process (S1730).

In the pending ball number command reception process (FIG. 81, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure pending ball number command is received from the main controller 110 (S1731). When it is determined that it has not received the normal figure pending ball number command, the process of (S1733) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern reserved ball number command has been received (S1731: Yes), the number of normal pattern reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding reserved number is sent to the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d Store (memorize) and update the value of the pending number counter 223j by adding 1 to it. Here, the reserved ball number counter 223j is a counter for displaying a reserved pattern in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and is configured to display a reserved pattern corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223j.

After executing the process of S1732, the process of S1733 is executed. In the processing of S1733, it is determined whether or not a special figure reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1733). If it is determined that the special figure pending ball number command has not been received (S1733: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure reserved ball number command has been received (S1733: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special figure (special symbol) is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding number of reserved balls is corresponded. The value is stored in the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m (S1734). It is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol reserved ball is stored (S1735). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1735: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S1735: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is on, that is, the execution of pseudo fluctuation is already set It is determined whether or not it is set (S1736). When the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1736: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S1737), and the process of S1738 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S1736: No), the process of S1738 is executed.

Here, when receiving the special figure reserved ball number command and newly stored from the state where there is no special pattern reserved ball, if the setting of the already set pseudo fluctuation is set, the setting is changed It is configured to execute the canceling process (corresponding to the process of S1737). Thereby, when the variation of the special symbols is started continuously, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pseudo variation is executed in the fusion symbol.

In the process of S1738, it is determined whether it is during the special symbol fluctuation period (S1738). When it is determined that it is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol (S1738: Yes), the value of the pending number counter 223j is a value greater than 0, that is, the pending symbol is displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6. It is determined whether or not there is a state (S1739). If it is determined that the value of the pending number counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1739: Yes), the fusion pending symbol corresponding to the special figure pending ball number counter 223m (holding displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6 symbol) is selected based on the lottery result stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k (S1740). Here, when the lottery result of the newly entered special symbol is a hit, the reserved ball is likely to be changed to a highly anticipated reserved symbol such as red, and when it is a loss, the expected degree of blue etc. A lottery that is easily changed to a reserved symbol with a low value is executed. In addition, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the displayed reserved symbol is always changed and displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the pending number counter 223j is 0 (S1739: No), the value of the pending number counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S1741). After that, the process of S1740 is executed. When the value of the reserved number counter 223j is 0, it means that the reserved pattern is not displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, so the value of the reserved number counter 223j is set to 1 in order to newly display the reserved pattern. The color of the reserved symbol to be added and newly displayed is determined in the process of S1740. In the process of S1741, a display pending number command indicating the value of the special figure pending number counter 223m and the value of the pending number counter 223j is set. Also in the process of S1749, a display command for changing and displaying the reserved symbols is set.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description continues. In the process of S1712, when it is determined that the general pattern variation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), the process of S1731 is executed. In the processing of S1731, it is determined whether or not the normal figure or special figure winning information command is received (S1731). If it is determined that the general or special prize winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the information indicated by the received general or special prize winning information command is stored in the general or special prize winning information storage area 223a, the special prize winning information storage Each is stored in the area 223k (S1732). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one process in the main process 2 (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of this variable display setting processing 2 (S1630). The variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in the fourth embodiment is different from the variation pattern selection process (S1803) in the variation display setting process (FIG. 42, S1613) in the first embodiment. ), the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805) is different from the first embodiment in that it is changed to the normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820), the process of selecting the variation pattern of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is executed.

Next, variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1820) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the fourth embodiment, the processes from S1908 to S1911 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 43, S1802) in the first embodiment, and when the pseudo variation starts The difference is that a determination process (S1920) is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the pseudo fluctuation start determination process (S1920), which is one process in the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 83, S1820) in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the details of the control process of the pseudo fluctuation start determination process (S1920). In the pseudo-fluctuation start determination process (S1920), whether or not to execute the pseudo-fluctuation in the fusion symbol after the fluctuation is completed at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol is executed.

In the pseudo-fluctuation start time determination process (S1920), first, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of the special symbol of the variation is out (S1921). If it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination is a hit (S1921: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the success/failure determination result is out, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S1922). If it is determined that the value of the special figure pending ball number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S1922: Yes), the special figure variation is executed continuously and there is no need to perform the pseudo variation, so the pseudo variation Terminate this process without setting On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1922: No), the winning reservation is stored in the normal pattern 2 reservation, or the normal pattern winning prize information storage area 223a (S1923). When it is determined that a winning hold is stored in the 2 holds of normal symbols (S1923: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1924). The maximum fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set to 30 seconds (S1925). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, when it is determined that the winning hold is not stored in the 2 holds of the normal symbols (S1923: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the result of the determination of whether to start the fluctuation is out, and in the state where the reserved balls of the special symbols are not stored, it is possible to hit within the two reserves of the normal symbols. If the holding ball is stored, the process of setting the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol is executed after the end of the special figure variation time to start the variation. Therefore, even if the variation of the fused design that the determination result of the deviation is notified, the variation of the normal design that is the next hit is completed, and the variation of the fused design is not fixed and stopped until the end of the period in which the winning game is executed. In addition, since the game is continued with pseudo fluctuations, it is possible to suppress the frequency of being notified of the failure, and to suppress the problem of discouraging the player and lowering his or her motivation for the game.

In this embodiment, the pseudo variation is set when there is a hit within 2 reservations of the normal design, but it may be set to 1 reservation, or may be determined and set as appropriate, such as within 4 reservations. Furthermore, when the reserved ball of the special pattern is stored, the pseudo fluctuation is not set, but the fluctuation period of the fusion pattern is set so as to be combined with the fluctuation period of the reserved special pattern. can be configured to In such a case, when the reservation of the winning special pattern is stored, the degree of expectation for winning can be increased as the fluctuation period of the fused pattern is longer by structuring it so that it is easy to synthesize.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description continues. In the process of S1804, when the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1804: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1830). In the normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), at the start of normal pattern variation, a process of selecting a fusion pattern or an auxiliary symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern (variation time) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (FIG. 82, S1630), will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). Normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1830) in the fourth embodiment is the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 44, S1805) in the first embodiment, S2021 to S2022 each process is added They are different in that respect. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S2005, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of whether or not the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is hit (S2021). When it is determined that the result of determination of whether or not the normal pattern that starts to fluctuate is a win (S2021: Yes), an opening notice is set corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation time (S2022). This open notice is set only when the special symbol is fluctuating and hits during the period when the special symbol is being varied (including the period when the corresponding fusion symbol is pseudo-varied). The release notice set here is a notice mode for informing the player of the shooting of the game ball shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b).

By configuring in this way, when the special symbols fluctuate, the fusion symbols are scroll-displayed corresponding to the fluctuations in the special symbols, and it is configured to make it difficult to determine the result of determination of whether the normal symbols are right or wrong. However, since the notice of opening is executed 3 seconds before the winning of the normal symbol, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of missing the opportunity to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description continues. After the process of the change display setting process 2 (S1630) is executed, the process of the pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) is executed. In the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the pseudo fluctuation, and the process of executing the display setting etc. of the pseudo fluctuation is executed.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of the pseudo fluctuation setting processing 2. FIG. The pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640) in the fourth embodiment is the first embodiment in that the processes of S2221 to S2222 are added to the pseudo fluctuation setting process (FIG. 45, S1614) in the first embodiment. is different from Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2201, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is off, that is, if the pseudo-variation is not executed in the fusion pattern (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the special figure variation outside (S2221 ). If it is determined that it is not the stop timing of the special figure variation outside (S2221: No), this process is terminated. It is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S2222). If it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S2222: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is 0 (S222: No), the process of S2207 is executed.

The processing of S2207 to S2213 has already been described in the first embodiment, but when it is determined whether or not to set a pseudo variation and the conditions for setting a pseudo variation are met, the setting of the pseudo variation is executed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol as well, and the variation corresponding to the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed in one variation in the fusion symbol. did. As a result, even if the game is complicated, the player can easily play the game by looking at the fusion symbols.

Also, when the fusion pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped and displayed, if there is a period during which the normal pattern is fluctuating until the next normal pattern fluctuation starts, the normal pattern during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Since the pseudo-variation is executed in the period until the fused pattern is stopped and started continuously at a good tempo.

Further, in the case of stop-displaying the fusion pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern, if the winning hold is stored in the two holdings of the normal symbols, the variation of the winning hold is stopped and the winning game is played. Until the end of the period during which is executed, the fusion pattern fluctuation is not fixed and stopped due to pseudo fluctuation, and when the ball enters the first entrance 64a, the fusion pattern continues until the period of the special figure fluctuation. Since the variation is executed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the fused symbol being stopped and displayed due to the notification result indicating the deviation, thereby suppressing the problem of lowering the motivation of the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to perform a pseudo-variation when the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped, but the pseudo variation is performed when the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. can be configured to

It should be noted that a pachinko machine may be obtained by combining some or all of the above embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (displays a pattern that combines normal and special patterns)
first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. provision means for providing a specific period during which the second judgment condition is likely to be satisfied when the first judgment result by the first judgment means is a specific judgment result; and the second judgment result by the second judgment means. is a specific second determination result, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first identification Display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the second determination condition is satisfied during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means and notification control means for notifying the information obtained by using the first identification information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the variation display mode of the symbols indicating the result of the second lottery is merely varied depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting hole in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are separately displayed on the display device, it may become difficult to understand the results of each lottery during the game. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may not be able to easily play the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the second determination result is also notified by the first identification information dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. By doing so, the timing at which the first determination condition is established and the result of the second determination can be known, and the game can be easily played.

In the gaming machine A1, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is displayed in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine A2 characterized by having a first display control means for displaying a part of information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the information based on the result of the first determination is displayed by the first identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to notify both the determination and the result.

The gaming machine A2 has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Machine A3.

In the game machine A2 or A3, after the specific display mode is displayed by the first identification information, if the second determination condition is not satisfied for a predetermined period even after the specific period has passed, the first identification A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the dynamic display of information is stopped.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of either the game machine A2 or A3, the effect that the first identification information is dynamically displayed for a long time and the problem that the result of the next first determination cannot be displayed can be suppressed. There is

In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, a variable ball entry means capable of being changed between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state is provided. The second determination means is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the provision means has the variable ball entry means for the first time during the specific period. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it is variable in state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first determination is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. It is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the ball into the variable ball entering means, and there is an effect that the game can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the first identification information is displayed by combining a plurality of identification pattern rows, and is displayed in at least one pattern row among the plurality of identification pattern rows. The result of the first determination is notified by information, and the result of the second determination is notified by another symbol sequence including the identification symbol sequence in which the result of the first determination is notified. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the first identification information composed of a plurality of identification pattern sequences allows the first determination result and the second determination result to be common to the symbol sequence. , and there is an effect that the number of pattern rows can be reduced and the configuration can be made easy to understand.

<Feature B group> (Structure to win according to the normal figure)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball and a first state in which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state can be changed. a variable ball entry means, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance means, and the first determination by the first determination means is a specific number A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the first judgment, a second judgment means for executing a second judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and the second judgment means. variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the second judgment by the judgment means is a specific second judgment result; and a delay means disposed on the upstream side for discharging the game ball in the direction in which the variable ball entry means is arranged after the game ball rolls for a specific period or more. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the state of the starting port is changed to the second state based on the first lottery, the game ball can reach the starting port with good timing during the second state. Otherwise, the second lottery would not have been executed. Therefore, when the starting hole is in the second state while the player does not shoot the game ball, it becomes difficult to let the game ball enter the starting hole.

According to the gaming machine B1, the game ball is discharged after rolling for a specific period or more upstream of the variable ball entry means by the delay means. Even in the first state, there is an effect that the game ball can easily enter the variable ball entering means.

The gaming machine B1 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass and detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means , a game machine B2 characterized in that the above determination condition is established.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the determination condition is satisfied by the game ball passing through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the rolling of the game ball. has the effect of

In the game machine B2, the delay means includes a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter, a flow speed reduction section that reduces the flow speed of the game ball that has entered the ball entry section, and a flow speed reduction section that a discharge portion for discharging the game ball to the outside of the delay means, and the ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the specific area is easily guided. Characteristic game machine B3.

A gaming machine B4 in the gaming machine B3, wherein the game ball deceleration section has at least a rolling path on which the game ball spirally rolls.

A game machine B5 in the game machine B3 or B4, wherein the game ball deceleration section has at least a mortar-shaped rolling path on which the game ball rolls in a circular shape.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, display means for displaying identification information based on the result of the second determination based on the second determination condition, and after dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means and dynamic display means for statically displaying identification information based on the result of the second determination, wherein the variable control means controls the identification based on the specific second determination result by the dynamic display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means during the specific period. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is configured with a period shorter than the dynamic display period.

In the gaming machine B6, the specific period is composed of a period obtained by subtracting a period necessary for the game ball ejected from the delay means to enter the variable ball entry means from the dynamic display period. A gaming machine B7 characterized by:

<Feature C group> (Pseudo fluctuation after special figure fluctuation according to the timing of normal figure fluctuation start)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after execution in the performance period, and when the first display means displays that the first determination is a specific result, the input of the game ball. A ball entry means for facilitating a ball, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. a second display means for displaying the result of the second determination after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, and the second display means indicates that the second determination is the specific result. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, when a specific condition is established, the end timing of the second effect period and the first effect period. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a correcting means for correcting so as to reduce the difference from the start timing of the presentation period.

According to the gaming machine C1, since the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period is corrected to be small, the first effect and the second effect are easily executed alternately. , it is possible to suppress the problem that the players get bored with the game by enjoying the mutual performance. Further, when the first determination is a specific determination result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means, so that the end timing of the first presentation period and the start timing of the second presentation period are more related, There is an effect that the production can be executed more alternately.

In the game machine C1, based on the execution of the second determination, from the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means and an overlap determining means for determining whether the first effect is executed beyond the period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the correcting means causes the first effect beyond the period by the overlap determining means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the correction is executed when it is determined that the correction is executed.

According to the game machine C2, since the correction is executed only when there is a difference from the start of execution of the first effect, there is an effect that the start timing of the first effect and the end timing of the second effect can be closer. be.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first pre-determining method for pre-determining a determination result determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is established. and when it is determined in advance that the specific determination result is determined by the first preliminary determination means, the first effect which is executed based on the first determination for the information is completed. 2 extension means for extending the performance period.

According to the gaming machine C3, since the second effect is extended until the timing when the game ball enters the ball entering means next time, the interval at which the second effect is continuously executed is shortened, and the player can start playing at an early stage. You can prevent the problem of boredom.

In either game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the duplication determination means performs the determination when the predetermined condition is established as the execution start timing of the second effect.

In the game machine C4, since the second effect period can be determined in advance in accordance with the execution start timing of the second effect, the control can be easily performed.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C4, the duplication determination means executes the determination by determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the second effect period. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, since the end timing of the second effect can be matched with the start timing of the first effect during the second effect period, when the first effect is executed after the second effect is started. There is an effect that it is possible to correct even

<Feature D group> (read ahead the judgment result of the normal pattern and execute the pseudo fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after execution in the performance period, and when the first display means displays that the first determination is a specific result, the input of the game ball. A ball entry means for facilitating a ball, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. a second display means for displaying the result of the second determination after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, and the second display means indicates that the second determination is the specific result. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when it is displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is established. Preliminary determination means for preliminarily discriminating the determination result determined by the first determination means based on the information; and variable setting means for setting.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the variation display mode of the symbols indicating the result of the second lottery is merely varied depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting hole in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are separately displayed on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the relationship between the first lottery and the second lottery.

According to the gaming machine D1, the determination result of the first determination is determined in advance, and the second effect period is varied. The second effect period can be varied, and there is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in a way that the player can easily understand.

The gaming machine D1 has a first effect period determining means for determining one effect period from a plurality of periods when the first determination is executed, and the variable setting means has a first effect period. The first performance is continued until at least the end of the first performance period corresponding to the determined first determination when the pre-determining means determines that the first determination results in a specific result. The game machine D2 is characterized in that the second effect period of the second effect being executed or to be executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine D2, the second effect period continues at least until the end of the first effect in which the next first determination becomes a specific determination result, so the second effect is continuously executed for the player in a short period of time. There is an effect that it becomes easy to be played and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine D1 or D2 has prohibiting means for prohibiting the second performance period from being varied by the variable setting means when the second determination is the specific determination result. Characterized game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is a specific determination result, the prohibiting means does not change the second effect period, so the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the variation of the start timing.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are at least executed by dynamically displaying common effect symbols on a display means. D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first performance and the second performance are executed by dynamically displaying the common performance symbols, so that the player can enjoy the first performance and the second performance. There is an effect that the 1st effect and the 2nd effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature E group> (Information of jackpot judgment with normal figure fluctuation and special figure fluctuation)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a result of the first determination when the first determination is performed by the first determination means. a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on; a ball entering means for facilitating entry of a game ball when the first determination is a specific result; and a game ball in the entering means. second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of the ball, and when the second determination by the second determination means is a specific determination result, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. and a continuous effect execution means for executing a continuous effect based on the result of the second determination that continues the first effect when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, A game machine E1 characterized by having

According to the gaming machine E1, since the results of the first determination and the second determination are executed in a continuous effect, the two determinations can be shown to the player as if they were the result of one determination. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the first effect executed based on the specific result of the first determination is continuously executed at least during the period in which the ball entering means is easy to enter. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first effect is continuously executed during the period in which the ball means is easy to enter, so the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily continue with the continuation effect that is executed when the second determination is executed.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 has display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows as the first effect, and the first effect executing means displays the plurality of symbol rows based on the result of the first determination. Of these, at least two are stopped by a combination indicating the result of the first determination, and the continuous effect executing means replaces the symbol rows other than the symbol row stopped by the first effect executing means with the second symbol row. The game machine E3 is characterized in that the game machine E3 is stopped at a combination of symbols related to the combination of symbols stopped by the first performance execution means in the previous term based on the result of determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to combine a plurality of symbols to notify the first judgment and the second judgment in order. There is an effect that the information can also be simplified and notified.

A gaming machine E4 in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is characterized in that the ball-entering means is configured such that the ball-entering is not allowed except during the period during which the ball-entering is easy.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second determination is not performed unless the first determination results in a specific determination result, so the second determination is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand the timing of

<Feature group F> (game characteristics)
first determination means for executing a determination in which a determination probability of a specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and the specific first determination by the first determination means A ball entering means for setting a period during which a game ball can be easily entered when determined as a result, and a determination as a specific second determination result when a game ball enters the ball entering means. A second determination means for executing determination with a probability set to the second probability, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines the specific second determination result. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a privilege game executing means.

According to the gaming machine F1, the probability of executing the privilege game can be set by combining the first determination probability and the second determination probability, so there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine F1, when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, a region in which the game ball can be entered and a region in which the game ball can enter and a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Game machine F2 to play.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, even if it is not determined as a specific second determination result, the game ball can pass through the specific area by obtaining a special second determination result. Since the player is provided with an opportunity to become a player, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine F3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F2, the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the frequency of determination as a special second determination result increases, and the player is made to execute a game that causes the ball to enter the specific area, thereby reducing boredom. can be prevented.

A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball entering the region can pass through the specific region and a second state in which the passage is more difficult than in the first state in the gaming machine F2 or F3. and variable control means for varying the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to change between a state in which it is possible to pass through the specific area and a state in which it is difficult to pass, so that when the game ball passes through the area, the rate at which the game ball passes through the specific area can be changed. It has the advantage of being controllable.

The game machine F4 has timing determination means for determining a timing at which a game ball can enter the area based on the determination as the special second determination result by the second determination means, The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is established at a predetermined timing based on the special second determination result.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area according to the timing determined by the timing determining means, so that the game ball can be easily moved to the specific area. There is an effect that the ratio of passing through can be controlled.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st ball entrance

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are made to be noticed, and the interest of the player is improved.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition, and storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means. a storage means capable of performing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a first determination condition is satisfied; a first display control means capable of causing a display means to display a mode indicating the result of the first determination after the first effect is executed in the first effect period when the first determination is executed; When a mode indicating that the first determination is a specific first determination result is displayed on the display means, a ball entering means for facilitating the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the entering means. second judgment means capable of executing a second judgment based on the fact that the ball is hit ; After executing the second effect displayed in the display means, it is possible to start displaying the mode corresponding to the result of the second determination on the display means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. 2. display control means; and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player after a mode indicating that the second determination is a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means. a preliminary first determination means capable of determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied; and, it is determined in advance that it is determined as the specific first determination result by the first preliminary determination means, and the specific result corresponding to the information determined by the first preliminary determination means A mode indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means, and the result of the second determination is based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means that facilitates entry of the game ball. The corresponding mode can be started to be displayed on the display means, and in the gaming machine, after the mode for indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, the first effect is newly started. The third effect displayed on the display means can be executed for a period of time until the operation means that the player can operate is operated during the predetermined period of the third effect. Based on this, it is possible to vary the aspect of the third effect .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means; first determination means for executing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means when a first determination condition is established; and the first determination is performed by the first determination means. a first display control means capable of displaying a mode indicating the result of the first determination on the display means after executing the first effect in the first effect period when the first determination is specified; When a mode indicating that the first determination result is displayed on the display means, a ball entering means for facilitating the entry of a game ball, and based on the game ball entering the ball entering means a second determination means capable of executing the second determination , and a mode corresponding to the result of the second determination means being displayed on the display means in a period until the display means starts to display a second display control means capable of causing the display means to start displaying a mode corresponding to the result of the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means after executing the second effect; a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player after a mode indicating that the second determination is a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means; and prior first determination means capable of determining in advance a determination result to be determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the stored information is established. , with the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined in advance by the first preliminary determination means to be the specific first determination result, and determined by the first preliminary determination means; The mode corresponding to the result of the second determination is displayed on the display means, and the mode corresponding to the result of the second determination is displayed on the basis of the game ball entering the ball entering means that facilitates entry of the game ball. The display means can be made to start displaying, and the gaming machine is provided with a period from when the mode for indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means to when the first effect is newly started. The third effect displayed on the display means can be executed, and the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated during the predetermined period of the third effect. It is possible to change the mode of the third production . Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the second variable winning device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting of the display screen in the third pattern display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbols in the third symbol display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a variation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a small winning scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a small winning scenario a, and (c) is a small winning scenario It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of b typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving / V) It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table, (c) 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within an audio lamp control device; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the V passage time process performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a sound ramp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a small winning opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. 4 is a flowchart showing pseudo-variation display processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a third embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation process 2 normally performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flow chart showing an electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion design performed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed about the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion design performed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is the display screen in the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a fourth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within a sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; It is a block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a pseudo fluctuation start setting process at fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding ball number command reception process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-variation setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4] is a front view of the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650. [FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

The inner frame 12 is provided with a large number of nails, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a, a first variable prize winning device 65 having a first specific prize winning port 65a, and a second specific prize winning port 650a. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) provided with the second variable winning device 650 and the like is detachably attached from the front side. A pinball game is performed by causing game balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. It's becoming

An upper tray 17 for storing game balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made uniform, and the pachinko machine 10 includes a "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage" which are not shown. There are three stages of Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-win effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64a, that is, the starting prize hole (starting prize) are in accordance with the themes given to each stage. designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. Sky stage"→"Island stage"→"City stage"→... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the pseudo-variation effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player is arranged to hit the game ball to the front surface of the game board 13, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for pressing down, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable switch for detecting the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by changes in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the player, and the ball is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box" or a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving game balls ejected from the lower tray 50. done. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , rails 61, 62, first ball entry 64a, first variable prize winning device 65 having first specific prize winning port 65a, second variable prize winning device 650 having second specific prize winning port 650a, normal symbol starting port (through A gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). A first ball-entering device 64 having a first ball-entering hole 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning hole 65a, a second variable winning device 650 having a second specific winning hole 650a, and a variable display device unit 80. are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a movable accessory for decoration that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so the range is limited. It is possible to three-dimensionally use the game area provided, and to provide the player with a variety of presentations.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear parts of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front surface of the game board 13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 70 made of resin that connects the rails. This is the area where the game ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball. , the momentum is attenuated and bounced back to the central part side.

The pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing door that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter the first ball entrance 64a and a closed state that prevents game balls from entering the first ball entrance 64a. A first ball-entering device 64 is provided. The opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 has a rectangular outer shape, substantially coincides with the outer circumference of the first ball-entering hole 64a, stands upright in parallel with the game board 13, and faces the first ball-entering hole 64a. By being arranged in such a manner that a game ball does not enter the first ball entrance 64a, it can be configured. The opening/closing door is rotatably supported at its lower end, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 about the axis when a solenoid (not shown) is activated (turned on). ing. As a result, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the upper surface of the opening/closing door, and the received game ball is guided into the first ball inlet 64a. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, and the game ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. Specifically, the opening/closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is always set to be in a closed state. is changed to When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is executed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute an effect based on the lottery result.

In the lottery for the special design performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, it is determined whether the special design wins a big win or a small win, and the special design wins a big win or a small win. When it is determined that the big hit type or the small hit type is also determined.

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbol wins is a big win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state (big win game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed (after the opening period has passed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses).

It is to be noted that, when one game ball wins the first variable prize winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (opening period), or when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period), and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed between the opening operations of the specific door 65f that are repeatedly executed (interval period) are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large amount of game balls (for example, about 150 (10 per round×15 rounds)) are won in the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65, so that a larger amount of prizes than usual is obtained. Balls (about 1500 (100×10 shots)) are paid out.

Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol jackpot, one of the two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" is determined (see FIG. 14 (b)), and the round set as the jackpot type The specific door 65f is opened a number of times (15R (round) in this embodiment). In addition, after the special game state ends, the time-saving game state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, three times if the jackpot A is won during the normal game state) based on the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot. ) is given.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery executed for the passage of the game ball to the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, the normal symbol determination is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening and closing door of the first ball entry device 64 located below the through gate 67 is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment), and the first A game ball can easily enter the ball entrance 64a. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64a, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, a selected variable time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) is reached. After a lapse of time, normal symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. be done. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is executed not only by the second symbol display device 83 but also by the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 . In the present embodiment, when passing through the through gate 67, the number of passages is held up to four times. .

Further, below the through gate 67, a crew member 660 into which game balls passing through the through gate 67 enter is arranged. This croon member is configured in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters. The ball-entering portion is configured such that the distance between the through-gate 67 and the ball-entering portion is less than one game ball so that game balls other than those that have passed through the through-gate 67 do not enter. A spiral flow path 660k is formed to spirally flow down the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion along the inner wall of the croon member 660, and at the end of the spiral flow path 660k, it gently moves toward the center in a mortar shape. A sloped bottom portion 660t is formed. The spiral flow path 660k is configured to guide a game ball entering the ball entry portion to the outer end portion of the bottom portion 660t so that the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom portion 660t. It is The bottom portion 660t has the same shape as the bottom surface of a known krunn, and guides the game ball gradually toward the center portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 660t, a ball outlet 660a slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12 mm) protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 660a, a spiral flow path is formed by a flow path wall protruding 0.5 mm. configured to be discharged to

In the present embodiment, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 pass through the inside of the crew member 660, but not limited to this, game balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 can enter. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the frequency of entering the ball into the crew member 660 is increased, and the ball can be more easily entered into the first ball entrance 64a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 660k is formed inside the croon member 660, but this is not limiting, and the spiral flow path 660k may not be provided, and the croon-shaped bottom surface may be configured only by the spiral channel 660k without forming the . Alternatively, instead of the spiral flow path 660k, a deceleration section may be formed that is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball. As long as it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be selected as appropriate.

As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball portion of the croon member 660 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the croon member 660 in the spiral flow path 660k and is guided to the bottom surface portion 660t. The game ball guided to the bottom portion 660t is gradually guided to the ball outlet 660a while making a circular motion on the bottom portion 660t from the outer peripheral side to the center. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 660a is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. while being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 660a. Therefore, it takes about 10 seconds for a game ball that has entered the entering ball portion of the crew member 660 to be ejected from the ball exit 660a. In the present embodiment, since the variation time for winning a normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 17(a)), when the through gate 67 is passed and the result of the lottery is a winning, At the timing when the variation ends, the entering game ball is discharged from the ball outlet 660a of the crew member 660. It can flow down to the ball entry device 64 . Therefore, even when the player stops shooting the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the opening/closing door is opened. A game nail KG is arranged below the ball outlet 660a at a position facing the ball outlet 660a. As a result, the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 660a and flowed down cannot directly flow down to the first ball-entering device 64, and the falling speed is reduced by the game nail KG, and further distributed to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to further delay the time until the game ball reaches the first ball entry device 64, so that it is possible to match the time lag from the determination of the normal pattern to the opening of the opening/closing door. , the game ball can be more easily entered into the first ball entry port 64a.

In this embodiment, the cloon member 660 is configured to delay the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol, but the timing is not limited to this, and the delay may be 5 seconds or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay, although the period is shorter than the winning fluctuation period.

In the present embodiment, in the case of an outage (in this embodiment, the probability of being out of 4/5), a small hit different from the big hit (in this embodiment, 1/5 of the jackpot) has a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, It is set with a small hit 1/4). When it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the type of the small hit is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small win, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific game state (small win game), and the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period (for example, , 1 round until 1.5 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won).

As a result, the ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 4, inside the second variable winning device 650 described above, a V passage 650e3 is provided (see FIG. 4). When the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects that the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) has passed (hereinafter referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is awarded.

Although the details will be described later, when winning a small win of a special symbol, three types of "small win A", "small win B", and "small win C" are referred to the small win type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). Any small hit type is selected from. Then, a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning type. In addition, although the details will be described later, only "small win A" among the three types of small win types is when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 as a result of the small winning game. , it is set to be able to pass through the V passage channel 650e3. That is, only "small win A" is set so that a big win can be given as a result of the small win game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 wins a game (so-called type 1 game) aiming for a big win by lottery of special symbols, wins a small win by lottery of special symbols, and enters the second variable winning device 650 by the small win game. A game (so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine) with a game (so-called 2-type game) aiming for a big hit by passing the winning ball through a specific area (in this embodiment, the V detection switch 650e5). have.

By having such game characteristics, the player can aim for a big win at a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 4(a)-(b). As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and the shooting handle 51 is moved so that the game ball passes through the left side of the third symbol display device 81. When a game is played in the operated game method (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650a (the game ball passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81). As compared with a game method (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) in which the shooting handle 51 is operated. This second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on the front side of the game board and has a front cover body formed with a specific winning hole 650a for receiving game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, and An opening/closing piece 650b configured to be rotatable to open and close the specific winning hole 650a and a flow path arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and through which game balls entering the specific winning hole 650a flow down are formed. It is mainly composed of the flow path member 650h. The second variable prize winning device 650 has a front cover body fixed to the game board 13 with screws so as to cover the through hole machined in the game board 13 by a router from the front side of the game board 13 . The front cover body is provided with a second specific winning opening 650a as an opening into which game balls flowing down the front side of the game board 13 can enter. As shown in FIG. 2, an open/close piece 650b that can be changed to an open state for guiding game balls to the second specific winning hole 650a is attached. As shown in FIG. 2, the opening/closing piece 650b is formed in a claw shape and has a tapered tip, and the other end of the tip is rotatably pivotally supported by the front cover body. there is The side of the opening/closing piece 650b facing the second specific winning opening 650a is recessed in an arc shape so as to guide the game ball to the second specific winning opening 650a when in the open state. The opening/closing piece 650b is configured to be variable between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid arranged in the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. Since the mechanism for varying the opening/closing piece 650b is already known, the details thereof will be omitted.

A part of the through hole is exposed in the lower left part of the front cover body, and is flush with the front surface of the game board 13 by a transparent plastic member so that the back side of the game board 13 can be seen. is blocked by A V passage 650e3 and a V detection switch 650e5, which will be described later, are visible on the back side of this plastic member. The letter "V" is printed to indicate that the Thereby, the player can visually confirm whether or not the game ball entering the second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

4(a) and 4(b) are diagrams showing a channel member 650h arranged on the back side of the game board 13 in the second variable winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 4( a ) is a switching valve 650 b 3 that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball entering the second specific winning port 650 a of the second variable winning device 650 to pass through the V passage 650 . is rotated upward (the solenoid is not activated). In FIG. 4(b), the switching valve 650b3 is moved downward so that the game ball entering the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can pass through the V passage 650e3. It is the figure which showed the state rotated by operating.

A channel member 650h formed on the back side of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). A game ball that has won a second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 rolls in a channel communicating with a through hole of the game board 13 formed inside the front cover body, and the back side of the game board 13. roll to. The channel member 650h is fixed to the back side of the game board 13 with screws so that the inlet 650a1 of the channel member 650h is arranged at a position facing the through hole. The flow path member 650h forms a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can flow down by the wall portion protruding to the rear side. A flow path is formed so that game balls passing through the inflow port 650a1 are distributed to either the discharge flow path 650e1 or the V passage flow path 650e3. A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at the abutting portion of the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. It is configured to be distributed to the V passage channel 650e3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the discharge flow path 650e1 is an upper flow path in the flow path member 650h. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to protrude to the rear side with a width through which one game ball can pass at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 by a width (15 mm in this embodiment) through which one game ball can pass. It is Below the inner wall portion 650f3, an outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 is arranged with an interval through which one or more game balls can pass. is formed. A partition wall 650f4 is provided to partition the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. The space from the partition wall 650f4 to the inner wall portion 650f3 is configured to be less than one game ball so that the game ball cannot pass above the partition wall 650f4, and the game ball that has flowed down surely flows down to the V passage 650e3. can do. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to gently incline downward to the left to a position just below the inflow port 650a1, and has a width through which one game ball can pass ( In this embodiment, they are formed with an interval of 15 mm). Between the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the end portion of the inner wall portion 650f3, the switching valve 650b3 is arranged so as to have the same upper surface.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 is formed in a plate shape having an upper surface through which one game ball can pass. is rotatably fixed to the This shaft portion is connected to a link member that is operated by a solenoid (not shown). When the solenoid is operated, this link member rotates, and the switching valve 650b3 moves within the range of the arrow shown in FIG. 4(a). is configured to rotate at When the solenoid is inactive, the switching valve 650b3 is biased and fixed at the solid line position shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 is received by the upper surface and rolled (guided) to the discharge channel 650e1. The game ball flowing down the discharge channel 650e1 is detected by a discharge detection switch 650e6 arranged at the end of the discharge channel 650e1 and guided to the channel where the game ball is discharged to the outside. A passage detection switch 650as having an inflow port 650a1 through which a game ball can pass is provided. It is detected that a game ball has entered the prize winning opening 650a, and based on this detection, the payout of prize balls, the counting of the number of winning prizes, and the like are executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4(b), when the solenoid is actuated and the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward, when the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 flows downward, the V passage 650e3 Since the entrance to is in an open state, it flows into the V passage channel 650e3. At the end of the V passage channel 650e3, the V detection switch 650e5 described above is arranged, and after being detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game ball is guided to the channel through which it is discharged to the outside.

In addition, in the present embodiment, execution of the small winning game is started when the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is a small winning. The start of the small winning game is a small winning scenario a 202 g 1 or a small winning scenario b 202 g 2 (see FIGS. (a) to (c)) is a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S402 or S403 in FIG. 27) By being set in, it is determined that there is a small winning scenario a202g1 or b202g2 setting ( S1301 of FIG. 36: Yes) is started. The start of the small winning game can be defined as the time when the symbol indicating the small winning is determined and stopped, and the determination period (1 s in this embodiment), which is the period during which the symbol is determined and stopped, has passed.

First, as common to the small winning scenario a 202g1 and the small winning scenario b 202g2, 1.5 seconds after the start of execution of the small winning game, the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward to allow the game ball to pass through the V passage 650e3. is set to After that, 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, the solenoid is deactivated and rotated upward, and the game ball is changed to a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to flow into the V passage 650e3. On the other hand, the operation (opening) timing of the opening/closing piece 650b, which is set so that the game ball can be entered into the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, is determined by the small winning type (that is, the small winning scenario It is variably set depending on whether a202g1 is set or whether it is a small hit type in which a small hit scenario b202g2 is set. Specifically, if the small hit type is a small hit A (small hit type in which the small hit scenario a202g1 is set), as shown in FIG. 16 (b), 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game It is opened and then closed 3 seconds after the start of the small winning game. On the other hand, if the small hit types are small hit B and small hit C (small hit type in which the small hit scenario b202g2 is set), it is released after 4 seconds from the start of the small hit game, and then from the start of the small hit game It will close after 5.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, if the small hit A, the opening and closing piece 650b will be in an open state during the period in which the game ball can flow into the V passage channel 650e3, so that the game ball will flow into the V passage channel 650e3. , the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and a jackpot game can be awarded to the player. On the other hand, in the small hits B and C, as shown in FIG. All the game balls that enter the second specific winning hole 650a without being allowed to flow in are guided to the discharge channel 650e1. That is, the small hit A is a small hit that can detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5, and the small hit B and the small hit C cannot detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. It is set to a possible (difficult) small hit.

In this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 is detected depending on the type of the small hit. It is possible to set the small hits (small hits B and C in this embodiment) that are not made depending on the type of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the probability (frequency) of giving a big hit by adjusting the selection ratio in the small hit type and adjusting the determination probability of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect not only the determination of the big win in the special symbols but also the determination of the small win. As a result, the player's boredom can be further suppressed.

A game ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 is detected by a passage detection switch 650as arranged in the inlet 650a1, and a ball that has flowed down the V passage 650e3 is detected by a V detection switch 650e5. A ball flowing down the discharge channel 650e1 is detected by a discharge detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning game balls (the total number of game balls detected by the passage detection switch 650as of the inflow port 650a1) and the total number of discharged game balls (the game detected by the V detection switch 650e5 and the discharge detection switch 650e6) By making it possible to detect the total number of balls), it is possible to monitor whether the winning game balls are discharged within a predetermined time. It becomes possible to easily discover a fraudulent act of intentionally leaving a game ball in the second variable winning device 650.例文帳に追加

The following detection sensors may be provided inside the second variable winning device 650 . For example, a switch that can detect the position of the switching valve 650b3 may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a malfunction of the switching valve 650b3.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. A first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display is provided in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is activated when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a.

The first pattern display device 37 indicates by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving or the normal state by the LED, indicates by the lighting state whether it is fluctuating or not, and the stop pattern corresponds to the jackpot. The lighting state indicates whether the winning pattern, the pattern corresponding to the small win, or the missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state. The segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs. is configured to

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display of normal symbols (second symbols) is executed in the second symbol display device 83 using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol (in this embodiment, for example, "○×" displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 shown in FIG. The variable display of the general pattern auxiliary pattern) is executed.

In addition, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, which triggers the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, is a hit of the normal symbol, so that the first ball entering device 64 is opened. configured only when That is, in the present embodiment, after passing through the through gate 67, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and the first ball entering device 64 is opened (normal symbol winning game period) after it stops at the winning symbol. During this time, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64a. Triggered by the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol). Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol, a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (in this embodiment, special symbol display shown in FIG. 5A) area Ds2, etc.) is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fused design that combines the variation of the normal design and the special design is variably displayed in the main design display area Dm of the third design display device 81 (see FIG. 5(a)). As shown in FIG. 5(a), the main symbol display area Dm is composed of a display area larger than the normal symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2, and the player mainly visually recognizes the fusion symbol. It is configured to execute a game by As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbols are hit, and the special symbols do not start to change until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. Although the start opening of the special pattern is lower than that of the game machine configured so that the ball can be entered at all times, the change of the fusion pattern is started when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player becomes bored and gets bored with the game early. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 has not only the fusion symbol, but also dedicated symbols corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol (ordinary symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1, special symbol display area Ds2 Since the special symbol auxiliary symbols to be displayed are also displayed, the variation state of the normal symbols and the variation state of the special symbols can be individually identified, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player. Details of the fusion pattern will be described later.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. A row (fusion pattern) is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(a), below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, there is set a normal figure reserved number display area Ds3. When the right to pass through the through gate 67 and start the fluctuation of the normal pattern is reserved and stored in this normal pattern reserved number display area Ds3, the reserved pattern indicating the reserved number is shown in FIG. This is an area to be displayed with "black circle pattern". It is configured to display one "black circle pattern" for one reserved number.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. FIG. The fusion symbols displayed in the main symbol display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is configured by adding numbers from "0" to "9" inside a decorated quadrangular decorative frame. Further, a left blinking display portion DF1, a middle blinking display portion DF2, and a right blinking display portion DF3 are formed at the lower end portion of the symbols in each symbol row. The right flashing display part DF3 of the right symbol row is configured to flash correspondingly to the winning variation display of the normal symbols. In this case, the middle blinking display part DF2 of the middle symbol row has a decorative function of blinking corresponding to the variation of the middle symbol row. On the other hand, the left blinking display portion DF1 of the left symbol row, the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row, and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the right symbol row are configured to blink correspondingly to the deviation display of the normal symbol. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the change in the special design and the change in the normal design in the fusion design while suppressing the discomfort. Therefore, the player can easily play the game by visually recognizing the fusion pattern, and can simplify the complicated game property and notify the player.

FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved normal symbols is 2, normal symbols and special symbols are out of fluctuation and stopped at symbols, and fusion symbols are also stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol is out of line, the symbol "○×" is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 5(b). On the other hand, when the normal symbol wins, the "OO" symbol (see FIG. 6(b)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fusion pattern, when it is out of the normal pattern, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 are stopped and displayed in a state of being maintained in the extinguished state (see FIG. 5(b)). .

FIG. 6(a) shows an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when one normal symbol reserved ball number is digested from the state of FIG. 5(b) described above and the variation of the normal symbol starts. It is a diagram. When the variation of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol auxiliary symbol in the normal symbol display area Ds1 is variably displayed. This general pattern auxiliary pattern is composed of a pattern row composed of a "○" pattern and an "x" pattern, and this pattern row is displayed in two rows in the normal pattern display area Ds1. When the variable display is started, the "O" symbols and the "X" symbols are repeatedly displayed variable at high speed. In addition, when the "○" symbols are displayed in the respective symbol rows, the normal symbols are displayed to indicate the win.

Synchronously with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, each symbol row of the fused symbols in the main symbol display area Dm also starts scroll display and is variably displayed. When the scrolling display of each symbol row is started, the blinking display portions DF1 to DF3 of each fusion symbol also start blinking.

FIG. 6(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6(a) described above and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a diagram showing about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, "○" symbols indicating the winning of the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. The fused symbols are displayed in a ready-to-win display mode in which "7" symbols are displayed in the left and right symbol rows and the middle symbol row is scrolled. Further, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the ready-to-win symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed while maintaining the lighted state. Note that the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row is displayed in a blinking state.

Thus, in this embodiment, the fusion symbol also starts to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol. Furthermore, if the result of determination of whether or not the normal symbol is successful is matched with the passage of the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the normal symbol, the fusion symbol is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode. In this case, the left symbol row stops changing first, the left blinking display part DF1 is lit, and after a predetermined period (in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol), the right blinking display part DF3 stops displaying. (stop display with reach symbol), and the right flashing display portion DF3 is displayed in a lighting state. In this way, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 start variable display in synchronism with the variation of the normal symbols, and the right blinking display portion DF3 is displayed in accordance with the lapse of the variable display time of the normal symbols. It is configured so that the blinking display ends. As a result, the player can determine the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by paying attention to the right flashing display portion DF3.

In addition, when the determination result of the normal symbol is out, the fusion symbol is configured so that all the symbol rows are stop-displayed with non-reach out symbols in accordance with the lapse of the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol. ing. In this case, the left symbol row is stopped first, then the right symbol row, and finally the middle symbol row is stop-displayed in accordance with the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol. In this case, each blinking display portion is also displayed after the blinking display is finished in the off state based on the timing when the pattern row stops.

In FIG. 7(a), the normal symbols described above with reference to FIG. 6(b) are stopped and displayed as symbols indicating winning, and the electric accessory (opening/closing door) of the first ball entry device 64 is operated to open and close. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol winning game period in which the door is in an open state is reached. When the winning game of the normal pattern is started, the fused pattern displays characters ``Put the game ball into the small attacker and enter the super reach'' while maintaining the ready-to-win display mode, and the first ball-entering device is displayed to the player. A notification mode is displayed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a of 64. FIG. In this case, the fusion symbols are displayed in the ready-to-win display mode, and the state in which the middle symbol row is scrolled at a low speed is maintained. In addition, in the present embodiment, according to the timing when the normal symbol wins, the notification is displayed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a. In this case, the notification may be made from a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 5 seconds before). Furthermore, an entrance ball opening for presentation (general winning opening (one ball is paid out to the player when winning a prize)) is arranged, and the player wins the entrance ball opening, whereby the third symbol display device is displayed. It may be configured such that the effect of the fusion pattern displayed at 81 is variable. By doing so, the player can easily play the game by shooting the game ball even during the fluctuation period of the normal symbols. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be entered.

Furthermore, by setting a long opening period (for example, 10 seconds) until the first ball entrance 64a is opened after the winning of the normal symbol, the opening period can be used to perform the first entrance. The game may be configured to make it easier for the player to enter the first ball entrance 64a by performing an effect for the player to shoot the game ball toward the ball entrance 64a. Furthermore, in the normal symbol winning game, the first ball entrance 64a is configured to be opened multiple times, and the first three times are short-term (for example, 0.5 seconds open for an interval period (first ball entry) The period during which the port 64a is closed) is opened for 0.5 seconds), after which the interval period (the period during which the first ball entrance 64a is closed) is set for 5 seconds, and then the first ball is entered. It may be configured to open the mouth 64a for one second. By doing so, the period until the fourth long-term opening is used to indicate that it is the period in which the first ball entrance 64a is opened, and the operation of opening the first ball entrance 64a is added. can be directed. Therefore, the opportunity for the player to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner, and the problem of missing the opportunity to enter the ball can be suppressed.

FIG. 7(b) shows the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the normal symbol winning game and the special symbol variation is started, as described above with reference to FIG. 7(a). It is the figure which showed about the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81. FIG. Dynamic display of the special symbol auxiliary pattern displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is started at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the special symbol starts to change. As shown in FIG. 7(b), the special figure auxiliary pattern is constructed by arranging a pattern row composed of a "○" pattern and an "x" pattern on the left and right sides. Winning of the special pattern is notified by stop display of ``○'' patterns aligned to the left and right, and misregistration is notified by displaying a combination of ``◯'' and ``x'' patterns. In addition, when it is a small hit, it is notified by stop-displaying "x" symbols aligned to the left and right. Also, when the special symbols are variably displayed, each symbol row is variably displayed by switching between the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol at high speed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in synchronism with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the fusion symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area while maintaining the ready-to-win display mode, and the main symbols are displayed. A super ready-to-win display mode effect is displayed in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm. FIG. 7(b) shows an example of a display mode of Super Reach, in which a monster and a hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters "If the hero wins, you win big!" are displayed. Here, in the example of the super reach display mode shown here, by displaying the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins, it is reported that the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big win.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 1/40 in the normal game state (other than the time-saving game state). Therefore, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a at a rate of one time after the normal symbol variation is started 40 times. On the other hand, the winning probability of the special symbols is set at 1/5, and the winning probability is set high in advance. Therefore, the start of the special symbol variation itself is a chance that the probability of winning is 1/5, and all the special symbol variations are displayed in a super reach display mode with high expectations for winning. configured to be

FIG. 8(a) shows the third symbol when the variation of the special symbol is started and the success/failure determination result is out, and when the variation time of the special symbol ends, as described above with reference to FIG. 7(b). 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a display device 81; FIG. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbols has passed, the variation of the special symbol auxiliary symbols displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped by the combination of the ``O'' symbol and the ``X'' symbol indicating the deviation. In addition, the fused symbol is also stop-displayed with a symbol different from the ready-to-win symbol ("6" symbol in this embodiment) in accordance with the timing when the special symbol is stopped, and the middle blinking display part DF2 is also displayed while maintaining the lighting state. . Furthermore, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the judgment result is wrong by displaying the characters "Sorry!!". In addition, before the display mode shown in FIG. 8A is displayed, in the case of the example of Super Reach shown in FIG. The fusion symbol that has been displayed is enlarged and displayed in the main symbol display area Dm.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the normal symbols and the special symbols are variably displayed, respectively, but the fused symbols fuse the variations of the normal symbols and the special symbols as 1 variation and display them variably to inform the player. do. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol wins and the special symbol variation does not start unless the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the normal symbol winning game. Since the fluctuation of the fusion pattern is started based on this, the game can be enjoyed with the production of the fusion pattern even during the period when the fluctuation of the special pattern is not started. Further, since the hit of the normal pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode of the fusion pattern, there is no need for the player to separate and recognize the normal pattern and the special pattern, and the expectation of the special pattern hit is high. It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in a state where it has become. Furthermore, during the normal pattern winning game, the player is notified to enter the game ball into the first ball entering device 64 (corresponding to the small attacker in terms of production), so that the fusion pattern reaches. By adopting the display mode, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player stops shooting the game ball and misses the opportunity to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a.

Also, although not shown in the figure, if the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, in the case of the example of super reach shown in FIG. , The reduced fusion pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner. After that, the special figure auxiliary symbols are stopped and displayed together with "○" symbols, and as for the fusion symbols, the same symbols as the ready-to-win symbols are stopped in the middle symbol row, and it is notified that the success/failure determination result was a hit (jackpot). be done.

In the present embodiment, the flashing display portion corresponding to the hit and miss of the normal symbol is configured to be variable, but not limited to this, the flashing display portion that blinks corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is all flashing display portions. As, all flashing based on the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, in a mode corresponding to the result of judgment at the fluctuation stop timing (for example, if it is hit, it is all lit, if it is off, it is all extinguished) It may be configured so as to display the confirmation. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the blinking display portion is a part of the pattern, but the background of the entire pattern may be the blinking display portion. (For example, in the case of a cat character, only the bell portion of the cat) may be used as the flashing display portion. By constructing in this way, the flashing display part becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the player can play the game while recognizing the fused pattern as a pattern for notifying one lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern). Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as for the display corresponding to the change of the normal pattern in the fusion pattern, it is possible to display the change of the normal pattern not only by blinking but also by adding an effect to the pattern and displaying it so that the effect moves. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by shaking a part of the pattern. Furthermore, it may be constructed such that the general pattern auxiliary pattern is displayed by replacing it with a flashing display portion or the effect of the fusion pattern. By constructing in this way, the area where the general pattern auxiliary pattern is displayed can be used for the production of other games, and the display area can be effectively used.

Next, referring to FIG. 8(b) and FIGS. 10(a) to (b), the pseudo variation of the fused symbols will be described. In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the fusion symbol in order to show the player the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation. However, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the fusion symbols maintain the ready-to-win display mode correspondingly, and are stop-displayed at the timing when the special symbols stop fluctuating. In this case, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 67 or when a held ball of the normal pattern is stored, the normal pattern is newly changed even during the special pattern change. be started. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, there is a case where the fluctuation of the normal design is in progress, and the fusion design cannot be changed at the fluctuation start timing of the normal design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation of the normal symbols is newly started during the variation of the special symbols, and when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the variation of the fusion symbols is stopped. In order to match the timing and the fluctuation start timing of the normal design, after the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, it is configured to execute the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion design.

With reference to FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the flow of pseudo variation of fusion symbols will be described. FIG. 10(a) shows the third symbol display when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, and two reserved balls of which the lottery result is lost are consecutively stored among the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the device 81.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), first, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed with the passing of a game ball through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variable normal symbol. is started (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, a selected variation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) elapses and the general pattern variation period ends, the winning pattern of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 6 (b) is displayed.). Then, the opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 is opened, and the third pattern display device 81 informs the player to enter the game ball into the first ball-entering port 64a of the first ball-entering device 64. is displayed (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7A is displayed).

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is performed, and if the special symbol lottery result is out, a pseudo variation is set when the special symbol variation display is set. Determine whether or not to set (determination timing). Although the details will be described later in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reservations of the normal design, and when it is determined that there is a hit within the 2 reservations of the normal design, a pseudo-variation is set. (sets the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON). In other words, as shown in FIG. 10(a), if all the normal symbols are not held in 2, the pseudo variation is not set at this point.

By configuring in this way, the lottery result in the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out, but when the fluctuation that becomes a hit in the fluctuation within 2 reservations is started, it continues with pseudo fluctuation until the fluctuation By continuing the variation of the fused pattern, it is possible to use the period to give various effects to the player. Furthermore, even if the variation is out of line, it is possible to make the player have expectations. In addition, the frequency of stopping due to the result of the winning lottery can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency (probability) of winning is high, and the player can continue playing the game.

Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 starts to change the special symbols (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7(b) is displayed), and five seconds before the special symbols stop changing, the pseudo-variation is started. Determine again whether to set or not. Details will be described later in the pseudo-variation setting process of FIG. 45, but first, it is determined whether or not pseudo-variation has already been set (the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON).

If the pseudo fluctuation is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reserves of the normal symbols, and if it is determined that there is a hit within the 2 reserves, the pseudo fluctuation is set (the pseudo setting flag 223h on). On the other hand, if there is no hit within the two holdings of the normal symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols to be started next, it is the execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the variable display of the special symbols is executed. It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is an execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the special symbol variation display is executed, a pseudo variation is set.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10(a), if there is no hit within the 2 reserves of the normal symbols, but it is the execution period during which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the special symbol variation display is executed. , to set the pseudo-variation. At this time, in order to match the end timing of the pseudo-variation to be set with the variation of the normal symbol being executed, the period from the end of the variation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the variation of the normal symbol (difference time t1 ) as the pseudo fluctuation period.

Here, when the fluctuation of the fusion design is stopped based on the passage of the fluctuation period of the special design, the fluctuation of the normal design is in progress, and the fluctuation of the fusion design is not started until a new fluctuation opportunity of the normal design. , the reserved pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, but the next lottery game is not started, so that the player gets bored or feels uneasy about the fact that the game will not be played. can be considered. However, in this embodiment, it is determined 5 seconds before the stop of the fluctuation that the fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed during the period when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is performed during the period until the end of the period. is set, the player can comfortably play the game by starting the variation of the next fusion pattern at a good tempo with the stop of the fusion pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation five seconds before the end timing of the special symbol. good. By constructing in this way, when passing through the through gate 67 after 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop of the special design and the fluctuation of the normal design is started, the fluctuation of the fusion design is started until the fluctuation of the normal design is stopped. It is possible to prevent undesired defects. Further, it may be configured such that the control load can be reduced by making a decision based on both the pre-timing such as 5 seconds before and the stop timing to increase the chances of setting the pseudo fluctuation in advance.

FIG. 10(b) shows the third symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, and two reserved balls of which the lottery result is lost and hit are stored in order among the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed on the display device 81.

As in FIG. 10(a), the result of the lottery of normal symbols is a win, the opening/closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and a special symbol is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a. If the result of the lottery is lost, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation when the variable display of the special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the winning hold is already stored in the two holds of the normal design, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special design, the pseudo fluctuation of maximum 30 seconds ends the fluctuation of the special design. is set from Here, the reason for the pseudo fluctuation of maximum 30 seconds is that the fluctuation time of the normal design is 10 seconds in case of winning and 10 seconds at maximum in case of losing. Therefore, even if 10 seconds, which is the longest variation of the variation of the normal pattern and the variation of the 2 hold, is selected, the pseudo variation is continuously executed until the variation of the normal pattern of the 2 hold is completed. be done. Therefore, the pseudo-variation ends earlier than the variation corresponding to the holding of the winning normal symbol, and there is a gap before the first ball entrance 64a is opened, which makes the game awkward. can be suppressed. In addition, the set pseudo-variation of maximum 30 seconds is compulsory when the fluctuation of the winning normal pattern ends, the first ball entrance 64a opens, the game ball enters and the special pattern starts to fluctuate. terminates properly. After that, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (in this embodiment, from the production of whether or not to change again shown in FIG. 8(b), the middle symbol row shown in FIG. 7(a) changes again. Display switched to production) is executed.

As a result, when the winning variation of the normal symbols has already been determined at the start of the variation of the special symbols (retained within 2 retention), the re-variation rendering is performed without displaying the losing performance. By executing it, the winning normal patterns are changed, and the effect of whether or not the special patterns change again can be performed, and the frequency of the losing effect is reduced so that the player feels regrettable. You can reduce the number of times you In this embodiment, even though the variation of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is pseudo-variation, the variation of the special symbol is 30 because the game ball could not be entered into the first ball entrance 64a. If it is not started even after the pseudo-variation period of seconds has elapsed, the variation is terminated without starting the re-variation with the pseudo-variation effect shown in FIG. 8(b).

On the other hand, at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the number of reserved normal symbols is less than 2, and if the winning reservation is not stored in the 2 holds, the pseudo fluctuation is set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. configured to prevent In that case, as shown in FIG. 10(b), five seconds before the end of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, it is determined whether there is a hit in the currently stored two holdings of the normal symbols, and stored. In this case, a maximum of 30 seconds of pseudo fluctuation is set as in the case stored at the start of fluctuation. Further, it may be determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation during the period for determining the symbol (in this embodiment, 1s).

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-variation at the start of the special symbol variation and 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation. It may be at the end or only at the end of fluctuation. Furthermore, only at the start of fluctuation, it may be configured to determine each time the normal pattern hold is established, or may be determined for a predetermined period (for example, every 100 ms), or by appropriately combining the above conditions good too.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8(b), display contents of the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In FIG. 8(b), when it is determined to set the pseudo variation at the timing of determining the pseudo variation described above with reference to FIGS. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed by 81. FIG. As described above, during the fluctuation of the special design, the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, when the fluctuation of the normal design is in progress, the fluctuation start timing of the special design and the fluctuation of the normal design In order to match the start timing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and after the out-of-special symbol (for example, FIG. 8(a)) is displayed, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the fused symbol is executed. there is

As shown in FIG. 8(b), since the normal symbols are fluctuating, the normal symbols are variably displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1. Then, a mode is displayed in which the fused symbols show signs of re-fluctuation, such as vibration of the middle symbol row of the fused symbols in the main symbol display area Dm. With regard to the possibility that the special symbols may change again by repeatedly hitting , it is suggested that pressing the frame button 22 should be accompanied by the words "Chance to change again with repeated button presses!" By displaying the mode shown, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner by performing a trembling effect in accordance with the frame button 22.例文帳に追加In this way, by performing the pseudo-variation, it is possible to match the variation start timing of the special symbols with the variation start timing of the normal symbols, and to show the variation of the normal symbols and the special symbols as one variation to the player. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets bored with the game early by giving the player an expectation for the re-variation of the special symbols. In addition, in the re-variation effect, if a hit hold is stored in 2 holds, if pseudo-variation is set, the probability that the effect sound will be changed when the frame button 22 is pressed is set high. , the trembling size of the middle pattern becomes large with a high probability, a special pattern is displayed, or a special lamp lighting mode is executed. In such a case, by configuring so that the same effect is executed with a low probability even when the winning suspension is not stored, the player expects that the re-fluctuation will be started. You can play games. Furthermore, in order to suppress the problem that the game ball is not shot at the timing when the first ball entrance 64a is opened when the pseudo-variation is executed, the game ball is notified to be shot. By firing, the middle pattern row is configured to tremble, or the through gate 67 is notified to pass the game ball, and the state in which the game ball enters the crew member 660 is notified to be maintained. It is even better to have a configuration that

FIG. 9(a) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the variation time of the normal symbols has elapsed from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, "O" and "X" symbols indicating deviation from the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the fused symbols, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed with "7" symbols and "5" symbols separated from each other. In addition, the flashing display areas DF1 and DF3 are also displayed in a lit state and a non-lighted state, indicating the deviation of the normal symbols. The medium symbol row is displayed with the flashing display area Df2 turned off, and it is notified that the special symbol has not changed.

FIG. 9(b) shows that when the variation of the special symbol is started and the success/failure determination result is a small hit as described above with reference to FIG. 7(b), when the variation time of the special symbol ends 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a pattern display device 81; FIG. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbols has passed, the variation of the special symbols displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stop-displayed in a state in which the "x" symbols indicating the small win are aligned. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in synchronism with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the fusion symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbols are displayed. A super ready-to-win display mode effect is displayed in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm. FIG. 9(b) shows an example of a display mode of Super Reach, in which a monster and a hero are displayed facing each other, and the words "If the hero wins, you win big!!" are displayed. Here, in the example of the super reach display mode shown here, by displaying the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins, it is reported that the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is a big win. Here, in the case of a small winning variation, a pattern simulating the second variable winning device 650 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the end of the variation period, and the game ball enters the second specific winning port 650a. A notification is executed to prompt the game ball to roll. Here, when the player enters the game ball into the second specific winning hole 650a and is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed in which the hero performs a special move to defeat the monster. be. When the game ball is not entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, or when it is not detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game is blacked out as it is, and the next variation is executed. In the present embodiment, a blackout effect is used, but it is configured to display an effect in which the hero loses to the monster by the ending effect of the small winning game, and the result of the small winning game is displayed to the player. can be configured to

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. Cover side and cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator (not shown) for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. It is transmitted in only one direction from the controller 110 to the sub-controllers. On the other hand, data can be transmitted and received bi-directionally to the payout control device 111 .

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, and sensors (magnet sensors, radio wave sensors) for detecting game balls and fraudulent games. Switch 208, opening and closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, switching valve solenoid 650c2 for driving the switching valve 650b3 in the second variable winning device 650 Various solenoids consisting of 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Also, the input/output port 205 is connected to a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 , and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasure signals output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253 . Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out prize balls one by one. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). Thus, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out continuously, such as during a big win, the payout motor 216 continues to pay out prize balls without a break, and the heat generation of the payout motor 216 is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down due to the melting of the resin portion or the elastic portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216 . In addition, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable parts of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the lower tray unit 15 operation and the parts touched by the player such as the handle 51), causing injury such as burns to the player. It can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of payouts until the payout motor 216 suspends the payout of prize balls and the pause period of payout are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 . Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter CS3 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, in the lottery of normal symbols, the second random number counter C4, the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 used for fluctuation pattern selection is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 33). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203e of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a consisting of one execution area.In this area, a first hit random number counter C1, Each value of the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type counter CS3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the pattern starting port (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 33).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the execution area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is stored in the sphere execution area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are 80 random numbers that become a jackpot with special symbols. It is In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big hit is 80, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/5".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)). As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot A". Become. Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

In addition, in this embodiment, as a kind of special symbol loss (other than the big win), a small win is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state. In the first winning random number counter C1, there are 100 random numbers that are small winnings of special symbols. stored. Among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of small winning random numbers is 100, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "1/4".

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter CS3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 are provided in the ROM 202 The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). In addition, the content of the small hit game according to each small hit classification is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop symbol of the fusion symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the stop type selection counter C3. A value of the stop type selection counter C3 is assigned to each of the symbols "0" to "9". In addition, when the same symbol as the ready-to-win pattern is selected, the determined symbol plus 1 is determined (for example, when the same "9" symbol as the ready-to-reach symbol is determined, " 0" symbol is determined).

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation type of the super ready-to-win as the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern of the fusion symbol). The variation pattern selection table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores a variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big win, a variation pattern selection table 202e2 for loss, and a variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small win. Each selection table stores a plurality of super reach variation pattern types. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each super reach type of each selection table, and the variation type obtained from the selection table corresponding to the success judgment result (either hit, miss, or small hit) The type of super reach is determined based on the value of the counter CS1. A variable time is set for each super reach type, and the variable time and the type of super reach are notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a variable pattern command. In the audio ramp control device 113, more detailed super reach details are determined based on the notified variation pattern command and the value of the effect counter 223g that has been acquired. As a result, main controller 110 performs rough selection and audio lamp controller 113 performs more detailed selection, thereby reducing the control load on main controller 110 . In the present embodiment, the variation time of the super reach determined by the main controller 110 is the same for each super reach. You may Further, the audio ramp control device 113 may be configured to determine the fluctuation time.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment, and the ball has passed through either the center or right normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set by the second winning random number table. If it matches the set random number value, it is determined as a normal symbol win.

There are 6 random numbers that are normal symbol hits in the normal game state, and the range is "0 to 5". These random numbers are normally stored in the random number table per symbol 202d (see FIG. 14(c)). In this way, the total number of random numbers for the normal design is 240, and the total number of random numbers for winning the normal design is 6, so the probability of winning the normal design is "1/40".

On the other hand, there are 240 random numbers that are normal symbols in the time-saving game state, and the range is "0 to 239". These random numbers are normally stored in the random number table per symbol 202d (see FIG. 14(c)). In this way, the total number of random numbers in the normal pattern is 240, and the total number of random numbers in the normal pattern is 240, so the probability of winning the normal pattern is "1/1". It's a hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the normal game state, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variation display is displayed on the normal symbol variation type counter. It is executed for a period (5 to 10 seconds) according to the value of CS2. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined as winning, and after the variable display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is illuminated and displayed. , the first ball entrance 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state, the first ball entrance 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is won. It can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the normal symbols always win, and the time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed is set to 3 seconds. Further, the opening pattern is set so that the first ball entrance 64a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol wins. In this way, in the time-saving game state, it is configured such that the game ball is easier to enter the first ball entrance 64a than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 33).

With this configuration, during the time-saving game, the variation of the special symbols is likely to be executed, and the possibility of winning a small hit or a big hit increases. Therefore, the possibility that the player will win a big win becomes higher than in the normal game state, and the player can be continuously given a big win during the time-saving game. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the time-saving game will be executed, and the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, in the time saving game state, the small winning type selection table 202c becomes a table dedicated to the time saving game, and in the table, by setting the ratio of selecting the small winning A high, the small winning game is executed during the time saving. When the game ball is detected easily by the V detection switch 650e5, it is possible to increase the probability that the big hit game is executed during the time saving.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 sets the special symbol lottery and variation pattern and the normal symbol lottery and variation pattern setting according to the value of the counter and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a first jackpot type selection table 202b, a small hit type selection table 202c, a second random number table 202d, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, a small win scenario table 202g, and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h are provided.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a is a table in which the values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Incidentally, in the first winning random number table 202a, the value of the random number that becomes the small winning of the special symbol is also set. The detailed content of the first hit random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(b).

The small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter CS3 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. In addition, the detailed content of the 1st small hit classification selection table 202c is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. When the random number specified in the second winning random number table 202d and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 match, it is determined as a normal symbol jackpot. Details of the second winning random number table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(c). In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the normal game state, after the variable display for a predetermined time (10 seconds) ends, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a The electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during time-saving), the win is always normal symbols, the variation time is set to 3 seconds, and after the variation display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a. The electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with is opened "2 seconds x 2 times".

In addition, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, may be changed between the normal game state and the time saving game state (during time saving).

The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a big hit variation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the success determination result is a big hit, and the success/failure determination result If it is out and it is a normal game state, the variation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown) for exclusive use and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) for exclusive use when the success judgment result is a small hit Each is configured at least.

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine the opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. It is Although not shown, the jackpot scenario table 202f consists of a jackpot scenario a 202f1 dedicated to the jackpot type of jackpot A and a jackpot scenario b 202f2 dedicated to the jackpot type of jackpot B.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario content) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (see FIG. 13(b)) that counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening/closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small winning scenario table 202g rotates the opening and closing piece 650b rightward so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a that opens the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. It is a data table used to determine the opening scenario to operate and the operation scenario to operate the switching valve 650b3, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small winning type are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(a), the small hit scenario table 202g includes a small hit scenario a202g1 (see FIG. 16(b)) for exclusive use when the small hit type is the small hit A, and the small hit type is a small win B or C, and a small win scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16(c)).

In this small winning scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h (see FIG. 13(b)) which counts when the small winning scenario is set. , the opening/closing control of the opening/closing piece 650b is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the switching valve 650b3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. In addition, in the process of determining whether or not the passage of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a and the V passage 650e3 is normal, the range in which the ball is allowed to pass is also based on the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h. stipulated.

The normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h is a data table used for determining the display mode of the normal pattern variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2. In this normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202h, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of normal patterns are defined. Specifically, the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202h is a general pattern variation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) dedicated to the normal gaming state, and a normal general pattern selection table dedicated to the time saving gaming state. It is configured at least by the figure fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving) (see FIG. 17(b)).

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). FIG. 13(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a time saving medium counter 203d, and a counter buffer 203e. , a V flag 203f, a big win scenario counter 203g, a small win scenario counter 203h, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entrance 64a, and has one execution area. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data are stored in the execution area. be.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 and the value of the counter C4 is acquired in accordance with the passage through the through gate, the winning information command including those values is output by voice lamp. It is sent to the control device 113 . When the general pattern winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the counter C4 from the general pattern winning information command and stores them in the RAM 223 as general pattern winning information. Stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases. 1 is added to (see S604 in FIG. 29), and 1 is subtracted (see S505 in FIG. 28) each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times M of variable display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S606 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 29: No).

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S506 in FIG. 28 and S605 in FIG. 29). The pending ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the variable display reserved balls reserved by the main controller 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the normal symbol pending ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving counter 203d is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203d is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (normal game state) with normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving medium counter 203d is set to zero, and in the main controller 110, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, in the normal game state, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", 3 is set, and if it is "jackpot B", 0 is set. ', 9 is set, and 'jackpot B' is set to 3. After that, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect ends until the value of the time saving counter 203d becomes 0 (S213 in FIG. 25).

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is referred to. Then, if the value is 1 or more, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for high probability) in the time saving game state (S510 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. (S518 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds×2 times is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a (S519 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for low probability) in the normal game state (S511 in FIG. 28), and furthermore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is obtained. is set to 10 seconds (S520 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds×1 time is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) attached to the first entrance 64a (S521 in FIG. 28). ).

The counter buffer 203e is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The V flag 203f is a flag for storing detection of the ball passing through the V passage 650e3, which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and the value of the V flag 203f at the end of the small win. Based on this, a jackpot is awarded. This V flag 203f is set to indicate the type of the jackpot based on the type of the jackpot in the V passing time process (S705 in FIG. 30), and is referred to in the small hit ending control process (S1405 in FIG. 37), and then It is set to off (S1406 in FIG. 37).

In this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which various counter values are added by timer interrupt processing. It may be measured using a period of time.

The jackpot scenario counter 203g is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening/closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined. Opening control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203g is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot control processing (S1102 in FIG. 34), and in the jackpot ending control processing, when the control based on the jackpot scenario ends, the jackpot scenario counter 203g is cleared (S1205 in FIG. 35).

The small winning scenario counter 203h is a counter for updating the small winning scenario in which the operation timing of various devices (the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable prize winning device 650 and the switching valve 650b3) is defined. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small winning based on the small winning scenario updated by the counter 203h. This small winning scenario counter 203h is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a small winning scenario is set in the small winning control process (S1302 in FIG. 36), and in the small winning ending control process, control based on the small winning scenario is completed, and the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared (S1404 in FIG. 37).

Next, details of various tables held in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17. FIG.

First, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the first winning random number table 202a, the value "0 to 79" of the first winning random number counter C1 as the determination value of the big winning, and the value "0 to 79" of the first winning random number counter C1 as the determination value of the small winning. The value "300 to 399" is set as the value "80 to 299" of the first hit random number counter C1 as a determination value other than the big hit and the small hit (loss).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the special symbol lottery results in a big win with a probability of "1/5" and a small win with a probability of "1/4". is a small hit with a high probability. By constructing in this way, even when a big hit is not achieved due to the variation of special symbols, a small win is likely to occur, and the player expects whether or not the game ball can be passed through the V detection switch 650e5 in the small win game. Many opportunities can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a special symbol jackpot and the probability of a small hit are constant even if the game state changes, but the period of setting a high probability game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases, and the time saving game Some of them may be configured to increase the probability of winning a small prize. Also, a winning opening for starting the second special symbol may be provided so that the second special symbol has a higher probability of winning a small prize. In addition, although it is configured to execute a big hit when a game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, it is not limited to that, and a high probability game state (probability variation) is established until a predetermined condition is established (until the next big hit, or a predetermined It may be configured to give (up to the fluctuation of the special pattern of the number of times).

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 as the judgment value of the jackpot A is "50 to 99" as the judgment value of the jackpot B. ” is set.

Here, when a jackpot game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and game balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a to win a large number of prize balls. The game to win is executed. In addition, a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is imparted after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, in the normal game state, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is performed three times. Granted. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided nine times.

When the jackpot B is selected, in the normal game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not provided. . On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, a jackpot game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R), and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state (time-saving) is provided three times. In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of times of time saving is limited and given, it may be configured to give until the next jackpot. In this case, by setting the jackpot type to which the time saving is not provided (or the number of times of the time saving is limited), it is possible to suppress that the jackpot continues excessively.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, by winning a special symbol jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), the state is always shifted to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. The number is set smaller than the jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the big win (jackpot C or jackpot D) executed by adding a specific area to the game ball during the small win game can make the player think that he/she has won the big win by himself/herself. This is to make the privilege of C or the jackpot D more advantageous to the player.

FIG. 14(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202d. As shown in FIG. 14(d), the second hit random number table 202d has a value "0 to 5" of the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal game state as the judgment value of the hit of the normal symbol, and in the time saving game state A value "0 to 239" is set for the second winning random number counter C4.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment wins with a probability of "1/40" in the normal game state, and wins with a probability of "1/1" in the time-saving game state.

FIG. 14(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. This variation pattern selection table 202e includes, as shown in FIG. At least a variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) is set. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Variation patterns for various jackpots are selected. Variation pattern selection table 202e2 for loss and variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small win are similar to the above-described variation pattern selection table for big win, variation patterns for various losses and variation patterns for various small wins based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected.

Next, the small hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the case of a special pattern small hit, the small hit type when the random number is "0 to 4" in the small hit type counter CS3 is "small hit A". . Further, when the random number is "5 to 9", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number is "10 to 199", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . First, when "small win A" is selected, a small win game corresponding to the small win scenario a202g1 is executed as shown in the small win scenario table 202g of FIG. 16(a). In the small winning game corresponding to the small winning scenario a202g1, as shown in FIG. An open scenario is set to open for 1.5 seconds. That is, as a result of the small winning game, it is possible for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and in that case, it is set to be able to give the big winning.

On the other hand, when "small win B" and "small win C" are selected, a small win game corresponding to the small win scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16(a)) is executed. In the winning game, as shown in FIG. 16(c), the opening/closing piece 650b is set to be in a closed state while the game ball can flow into the V passage 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. That is, as a result of the small winning game configured to make it difficult to win the V detection switch 650e5, the large winning is set to be impossible (difficult). For both "B" and "small win C", a special symbol variation time of 20 seconds is set.

Thus, by varying the opening pattern of the opening/closing piece 650b during the small winning game according to each small winning type, the game ball flows into the V passage channel 650e3, which is a small winning advantageous to the player of the small winning game. Possible small winning games and disadvantageous small winning games in which game balls cannot (difficultly) flow into the V passage 650e3 can be set, and various game characteristics can be provided. .

Next, referring to FIG. 16, the small winning scenario table 202g will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning scenario table 202g. The small winning scenario table 202g is defined so that small winning scenarios corresponding to the small winning types selected by the small winning type selection table 202c can be selected, and a small winning game is executed based on the selected small winning scenario. executed.

The small winning scenario table 202g has a small winning scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small winning A and a small winning scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small winning B or C as selected small winning scenarios.

First, the small winning scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG.16(b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of small hit scenario a202g1. When the small winning scenario a202g1 is set, the small winning scenario counter 203h starts counting (S1302 in FIG. 36), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h are executed. . Note that the counter value is incremented in the main processing of main controller 110 which is executed at a 4 millisecond cycle, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small winning scenario a202g1 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the opening period for the small winning starts. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have passed), the small winning opening period ends, and a state (V route open state ), the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward. Then, when the counter value is updated to 376, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of 1 round). After that, when the counter value reaches 750 (3 seconds elapsed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the opening/closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

The closing condition (end condition) of the opening/closing piece 650b in one round of the pachinko machine 10 is when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, and when 10 balls are placed in the second specific winning hole 650a. This is the case when Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win in the second specific winning port 650a within 1.5 seconds after the opening and closing piece 650b is opened, the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is set to 749 ( It is configured to execute update processing until one round before the end of one round). In addition, in the small hit game, since the opening period of one round is set short, in reality, 10 balls will not be entered, and the opening period will pass, so before 10 balls are entered It is configured so that one round ends at As a result, it is configured so that prize balls are not given excessively in the small winning game, and is configured to be different from the big winning game.

With this configuration, after that, the counter value is incremented by 1, so that the counter value becomes 750 and the operation control for closing the opening/closing piece 650b is executed. is not required to be executed, the processing load can be reduced, and in the event that each round end condition occurs at approximately the same timing, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the operation control of the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2. .

Then, when the counter value is updated to 751, the ending period of the small win is started, the ending display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), the second variable winning. The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the game ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the V passage 650e3 in the device 650 (V route closed state). do. Then, when the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed), the small winning ending period is terminated.

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is opened to when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed, Since the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON and the opening/closing piece 650b is opened, it is possible to allow the game ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage 650e3. That is, the period (counter values 376 to 750 ) allows the game ball that entered the second specific winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage 650e3, and the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 to give the player a jackpot game. A small winning game will be provided.

Next, the small winning scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16(c). FIG.16(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of small hit scenario b202g2. This small winning scenario b202g2 is a small winning scenario in which the small winning type is set to the small winning B or the small winning C as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. This is a scenario that provides a small winning game.

When the small hit scenario b202g2 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the opening period of the small hit is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have passed), the small winning opening period ends, and a state (V route open state ), the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), the opening period for the small win ends, and the game ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the V passage channel 650e3 in the second variable prize winning device 650 ( The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so as to enter the V route closed state.

When the counter value is updated to 1001, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned on in order to open the opening/closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1375 (5.5 seconds have elapsed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing piece 650b was opened, the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the opening/closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

Then, when the first round ends, the small winning ending period is executed until the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed).

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is opened to when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed, Since the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is inoperative and the opening/closing piece 650b is in a closed state, the game ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a cannot flow down to the V passage 650e3, and the second specific winning hole All game balls entering the 650a are guided to the discharge channel 650e1. In other words, it is impossible to let the game ball that has entered the second specific winning hole 650a flow down to the V passage channel 650e3, to detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5, and to provide the player with a jackpot game ( It will provide a small hit game that is difficult).

As described above, in the small winning scenario a202g1 and the small winning scenario b202g2, the timing for setting the switching valve solenoid 650c2 to ON and OFF is the same as the small winning start timing (special figure stop timing), but the opening and closing piece solenoid The timing of turning on and off the 650f2 is different. By varying the timing of turning on and off the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 according to the type of small win in this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 detects the V detection switch 650e5. It is possible to set a small win (small win A in this embodiment) and a small win (small wins B and C in this embodiment) in which no big win is given to the player, thereby providing a variety of game characteristics. be able to.

In this embodiment, the start timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect of the small winning game is one second before the opening operation of the opening and closing piece 650b in both the small winning scenarios a202g1 and b202g2. Until that period, the third symbol display device 81 displays a fusion symbol effect (a battle effect between a monster and a hero). It is configured such that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small winning game corresponding to the small winning scenario b202g2. Therefore, it is made difficult for the player to discriminate the type of the small win during the display period of the opening effect, etc., and recognize in advance whether it is a small win that can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. The game can be actually played, and the game can be played in anticipation that the game ball will be detected by the V detection switch 650e5.

Next, the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, this general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202h includes a general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) and a general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (short time) (FIG. 17 ( b) see) is set at least.

First, with reference to Drawing 17 (a), a normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) is explained. FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (normal). The normal pattern variation pattern selection table (normal) is a data table that defines the display mode (variation time) of the normal pattern variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state, and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 Based on this, various variation patterns (variation time and hit effect time) are selected.

In the normal pattern variation pattern selection table (normal), normal symbol per variation patterns A to C are set as variation patterns to be selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is a win, and in the normal game state Ordinary design loss fluctuation patterns A to C are set as fluctuation patterns to be selected when the lottery result of the ordinary design is out.

First, the normal symbol per variation patterns A to C selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is a win will be described. The normal per-symbol variation pattern A is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 79", and the normal per-symbol variation pattern B is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "80 to 149". 2, and the normal per symbol variation pattern C is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "150 to 198". For each of the normal per-symbol variation patterns A to C, a variation time of 10 seconds and a per performance time of 3 seconds are set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time for winning a normal symbol is set to 10 seconds. It is configured to take about 10 seconds to complete. Therefore, when passing through the through gate 67 and the lottery result is a hit, the game ball entering from the ball outlet 660a of the crew member 660 is discharged at the timing when the variation ends, so the first entering ball The game ball can flow down to the first ball entering device 64 in accordance with the timing when the opening/closing door of the device 64 is opened. Therefore, even when the player stops shooting the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the opening/closing door is opened.

Next, normal symbol loss variation patterns A to C selected when the normal symbol lottery result in the normal game state is out will be described. The normal symbol deviation variation pattern A is a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 29", and the normal symbol deviation variation pattern B is a normal symbol variation. The value of the type counter CS2 is a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds set when the value is "30 to 99". This is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG.17(b), normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours) is demonstrated. FIG.17(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours). Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table (shortening of working hours) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selected when it is in the time saving gaming state is defined. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is "1/1", and the normal symbol always hits.

Similar to the above-described general pattern variation pattern selection table (normal), various variation patterns are selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and for the jackpot variation pattern The only difference is that the selected variation pattern (variation time) is different, so the description is omitted.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the voice ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal figure variation pattern selection table 222b, a small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, and a pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. The variation pattern selection table 222a is already known and will be briefly described, but based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation content (variation time) is referred to when determining more detailed variation contents. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

Ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 222b and small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, like variation pattern table 222a, based on the general figure variation pattern command or variation pattern command output from main controller 110, the variation pattern command are referred to when determining more detailed variation contents from the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The pseudo-fluctuation pattern selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect display contents of pseudo-fluctuations that are executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the pseudo-fluctuation means that when the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started during the fluctuation of the special design, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, the fluctuation of the special design is normal. This is a variation that is executed after the special symbol variation is stopped in order to match the symbol variation start timing.

Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. be done.

Next, the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 18(b). FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. This pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d is a data table used to determine the display mode of the pseudo variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each effect type of the pseudo variation and the value of the effect counter 223g.

Here, the pseudo-fluctuation effect type will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 10(a), 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special design stops, there is no hit within the 2 hold of the normal design, and the normal design stops after the stop timing of the next special design. When the variation is being executed, the deviation pseudo variation is set in the variation time of the differential time t1 from when the variation of the special symbol stops until when the variation of the normal symbol stops.

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 10(b), the result of the determination of whether the special symbol starts to change is out, and if there is a hit in the next normal symbol 2 hold, the continuation pseudo for a maximum of 30 seconds. Variation is set.

The pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a pseudo fluctuation pattern based on the set production type and the value of the production counter 223g in the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S2102 in FIG. 44). Specifically, when the effect type is out, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 30", the "outfall pseudo fluctuation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is " 31 to 100", "off pseudo fluctuation pattern B" is selected, and when the value of the effect counter 223g is "101 to 198", "off pseudo fluctuation pattern C" is selected. be.

On the other hand, when the effect type is continuous, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 50", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is "51 to 130", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern B" is selected, and when the value of the effect counter 223g is "131-198", the "continuous pseudo-fluctuation pattern C" is selected.

In various continuous pseudo-fluctuation patterns, it is a pseudo-fluctuation of up to 30 seconds, and at the timing when the fluctuation of the special pattern starts, it is a production mode that can be switched to a re-fluctuation production (fluctuation production of the fusion pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the special pattern). It is configured. On the other hand, in the various outlier pseudo fluctuation patterns, blackout is set in the set pseudo fluctuation period.

Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 18(c). FIG. 18(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a normal pattern winning prize information storage area 223a, a normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b, a pseudo fluctuation flag 223c, a normal pattern holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type At least a selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a pseudo setting flag 223h, and a pseudo fluctuation setting area 23i are provided.

The general pattern winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a second winning random number counter that is winning information. The value of C4 is stored. In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball passes through a through gate (ordinary pattern start opening) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the through gate passage is used to correspond to the through gate passage. Various information obtained when the lottery of normal symbols is performed (win or fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is voiced from the main controller 110 The lamp control device 113 is notified by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The general pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON when the general pattern fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1713 in FIG. 40), and in the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process, the third symbol display device It is set to OFF when the variable display of normal symbols is set in 81 (S2001 in FIG. 44). When the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern extracted from the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern command for display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S1602 in FIG. 39). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display normal pattern variation pattern command, the normal pattern variation pattern indicated by this display normal pattern variation pattern command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started so that the variable display is performed.

Pseudo-variation flag 223c is a flag used to determine whether the display mode of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-variation, and is set to ON in the pseudo-variation start setting process (Fig. 44 S2104 of FIG. 43), is set to OFF in the variation pattern setting process (S1904 of FIG. 43). When this pseudo-fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON, even if it is the fluctuation start timing of the normal pattern, a new fluctuation in the fusion pattern is not started, and the normal pattern auxiliary pattern (normal pattern display area Ds1 is displayed) The fluctuation start is executed only with the symbol that is displayed).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, like the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of normal-pattern pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot obtain the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d counts the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is designed to manage

Specifically, in the main control unit 110, when the number of normal-pattern pending balls in the variable display is added by passing through the through gate 67, or in the main control unit 110, the variable display in the normal pattern is executed and the reserved ball When the number is subtracted, a normal pattern reserved ball number command indicating the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 is acquired from the normal pattern reserved ball number command. Then, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S1710 in FIG. 40). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is updated, the normal symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

The value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d is used for displaying the normal pattern reserved ball number pattern in the third design display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d in response to the reception of the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and the normal symbol reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of normal-map reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the normal pattern reserved number display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the number of normal design reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third design display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON when a special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S1702 in FIG. 40), and in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), the It is set to OFF when the variable display of special symbols in the 3-symbol display device 81 is set (S1901 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (S1602 in FIG. 39). It is transmitted towards device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S1705 in FIG. 40), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S1808 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop symbol of the fusion pattern corresponding to the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the stop type command for display. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used when determining a variation pattern of pseudo variation and various variations. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1611 in FIG. 39).

The pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON in order to execute pseudo variation. This pseudo setting flag 223h is that the start of the variation display is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), and the special symbol lottery result (at the time of the variation start) is out, and the next normal symbol 2 It is set to ON when there is a hit in the hold (S1910 in FIG. 43). That is, the pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the pseudo variation after the special symbols are stopped during the variation of the special symbols. Also, in the pseudo variation setting process (see S1614 in FIG. 45), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to off 5 seconds before the stop of the special figure variation, and if there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 hold, or , It is set to ON when it is a period in which the normal pattern fluctuation that stops after the stop timing of the special pattern is executed (S2210, 2213 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S2107 in FIG. 41). By setting the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON, the pseudo variation is started after the special symbol variation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency that the fusion symbol stops at the lost symbol, and to reduce the frequency that the player is disappointed with the determination result of the failure. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if the fused symbols are changed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making the player play the game with higher expectation.

The pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i is a storage area in which fluctuation data (fluctuation period, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of the pseudo fluctuation is set.

The pending number counter 223 j is a counter for setting the number of pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, as described above, during the variation of the special symbol or during the pseudo variation, a new variation of the normal symbol is not started with the fusion symbol, but is executed only with the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. In this case, the reserved design of the normal design displayed on the third design display device 81 is not dared to be updated, but is configured to appear as if one variation of the fusion design corresponds to one variation of the reserved design. is doing. However, in this case, a difference occurs between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, by independently providing a counter for displaying the reserved design, it is configured so that the difference from the actual number of reservations can be grasped, and when a difference occurs as described later, a new normal design In the fluctuation of the fusion pattern corresponding to the start of the fluctuation, the pseudo continuous figure fluctuation that performs the pseudo stop is executed, and the holding number counter 223j is subtracted at the timing of the pseudo stop so that it matches the actual holding number. configured to make corrections. Therefore, even if there is a difference from the actual number of reservations, correction can be made. In addition, when the reservation of the normal pattern is not stored in the state where the difference occurs, the difference from the actual reservation is corrected by configuring the fusion pattern to change by 1 in a pseudo-disconnected manner. It is preferable to correct by configuring as follows.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined address is the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) executed after the boot process (S2301 in FIG. 46) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 48(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2303 and S2304 in FIG. 46).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after the suspension of the variation performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64a is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 20(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

As shown in FIG. 21, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 20(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 19) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the through gate 67, the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately start the variable performance. You can prevent the condition from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of this normal pattern, the more chances the game ball passes through the first ball entrance 64a, so the chances of special pattern lottery are increased, and the chances of winning the special pattern also increase. become more. As a result, there are more chances that the opening and closing door attached to the first ball entrance 64a will be opened as a result of a special symbol jackpot, so that the game ball can easily enter the specific winning entrance 65a. In addition, since the opening and closing piece 650b is often opened as a small hit of a special symbol, the game ball easily enters the second specific winning port 650a, and the game ball flows into the V passage 650e3. becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that a jackpot game will be awarded, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64a is a prize winning opening in which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters, so that a jackpot of normal symbols is opened and closed accompanying the first ball entrance 64a. When the door is opened and it becomes easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64a, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 (S2305 in FIG. 46). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, It is set to OFF (S4605 in FIG. 60(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S2601 in FIG. 48B), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination processing (see S2608 in FIG. 48B) and the simple display setting processing (see FIG. (b) S2609) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (FIG. 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S4501 in FIG. 60A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (FIG. 60(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 61) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (FIG. 23) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (FIG. 23) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 executes display setting processing for V interrupt processing (S2603 in FIG. 58) based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed. ), pointer update processing (S4205 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 23), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing of one frame image are completed, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (S4207 in FIG. 58). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S2302 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S4713 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (S4714 in FIG. 61), The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S4802 in FIG. 62).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed (S4803 in FIG. 62) each time the rendering process of the process (FIG. 48B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 to 37. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter CS3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (399, 99, 99, 239 and 199 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 (counter buffer 203i).

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81, etc., along with the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37. (S104), and thereafter, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64a is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 A thru-gate passing process is executed as the ball passes (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further the V passage time processing (S109) is executed. The details of this V passage time process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the process of S109, other processes to be periodically executed are then executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (starting opening) (S203). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (S203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S203: Yes), the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stopped. The values of the type counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area (S204).

When the process of S204 is finished, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S205), and the process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S206). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S206: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S206, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S206: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S207). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S205), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S205) is executed, a special symbol stop symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot A or B is a jackpot according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the predetermined LEDs of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37 are lit in blue, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S207 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) (this lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S208). Then, if the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S208: Yes), a jackpot scenario table (not shown) is used to set a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (S209). When the processing of S209 is finished, the value of the counter 203d during time saving is set from the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)) based on the jackpot type and game state game state (normal game state, time saving game state) Then (S210), the process proceeds to S215.

On the other hand, in the processing of S208, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S208: No), then it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a small hit of the special symbol (S211). In the processing of S211, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the small winning of the special symbol (S211: Yes), small winning start setting processing is executed to start the small winning (S212), and S213. to process. Details of the small winning start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S211, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S211: No), the lottery result of this time is a loss of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S213.

In the process of S213, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203d is greater than 0 (S213). The value of the time saving counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S214), and the process proceeds to S215. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203d is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S215.

In the process of S215 executed after the process of S210, S213 or S214, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S207 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the fluctuation stop of special symbols, special symbol auxiliary symbols, etc. displayed in (S215).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start process (S205) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S205). This special symbol variation start process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. Based on the values of various counters, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a (S301). Next, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S301 is obtained (S302). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 of the special symbol is acquired.

After finishing the process of S302, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the process of S302 (S303). More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S302 is compared with the big winning judgment value stored in the first winning random number table 202a to acquire the lottery result. As described above, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 79", the lottery result is a big win, and when the value is "300 to 399", the lottery result is a small win (Fig. 14 (a) )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S303 is a big win (S304). In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S304: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set (S305).

More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first big winning type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots It is determined what the jackpot type is among the types (jackpot A, jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10(b)).

In the processing of S305, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the process of S305 is finished, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301, the big winning variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 14(d)) is referred to determine the big winning variation pattern (S306 ), and the process proceeds to S312.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S304: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S307). In the process of S307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S308), and acquired in the process of S301. A small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S312.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S310).

When the processing of S310 is completed, an outlier variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

In the processing of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the missing symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S301 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

After completing the processing of S306, S309 or S311, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is set (S312). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S305, S308 or S310 is set (S313). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 33). be. When the process of S313 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the small winning start setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S212). This small winning start setting process (S212) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning game.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 By passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5), a big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state that increases the possibility of being

Returning to FIG. 27, the description continues. In the small winning start setting process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small winning A (S401). In the process of S401, if it is determined to be a small hit A (S401: Yes), using the small hit scenario table 202g, set a small hit scenario a202g1 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) ( S402), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, if it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S401: No), using the small hit scenario table 202g, a small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) It sets (S403) and terminates this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) and the first entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the mouth 64a.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the normal pattern (second pattern) winning, the second pattern display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a. while being controlled. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (not 0). (S504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted, and the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

When the processing of S507 is completed, it is next determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol working hours (whether or not the value of the working hours counter 203d is greater than 0) (S508). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving mode (the value of the time saving mode counter 203d is greater than 0) (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress. (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

In the process of S509, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. That is, in the time-saving state, it always hits the normal pattern. (See FIG. 14(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S509, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511.

Also, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving mode of the normal pattern (the value of the time saving counter 203d is 0) (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S511). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "6 to 239", the normal design is off. (see FIG. 14(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S510 or S511 is a hit of the normal symbol (S512). When it is determined that the win is the normal symbol (S512: Yes), the display mode at the time of the win is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S513), and the process proceeds to S515. In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of the pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S514), and the process proceeds to S515. . In the process of S514, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S515, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is obtained (S515), and then it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (whether the value of the counter 203d during time saving is greater than 0) (S516).

When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving mode (the value of the time saving counter 203d is greater than 0) (S516: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress. (S517). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

In the process of S517, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S517: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so it is obtained in the process of S515. Based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state, the normal symbol per variation pattern is selected, and the determined variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114. A figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S518). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol variation pattern D (variation time 3 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol Select variation pattern E (variation time 3 seconds). Also, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern F (fluctuation time 3 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17(b)). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the process of S518 ends, the gaming state is in the time saving mode, so the opening time of the electric accessary (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S519). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S516, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving of normal symbols (the value of the counter 203d during time saving is 0) (S516: No), and in the processing of S517, the special symbols If the jackpot is in progress (S517: Yes), the process proceeds to S520.

In the processing of S520, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot of special symbols. Based on the normal pattern variation pattern selection table for the game state, the normal pattern per variation pattern is selected, and the normal pattern variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S520). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the normal game state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol variation pattern A (variation time 10 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol Select variation pattern B (variation time 10 seconds). Also, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17(a)). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S520 ends, the gaming state is not the time saving mode, so the opening time of the electric accessary (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S521). , the process ends.

In this way, when the game state of the normal design is the time saving game state (during time saving), the game state of the normal design is compared with the normal game state (during non time saving), the time of fluctuation display is "10 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is lengthened to "2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the first entrance A state is created in which the ball can easily enter the ball opening 64a.

Also, in the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S522). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S518 or the process of S520 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S522, if the variable time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S514, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S514.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S524). If the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the control start of opening and closing of the electric accessory (opening/closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a is set (S525), and this process is executed. finish.

By the processing of S525, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory (opening and closing door) is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see S1006) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, the electric role The opening and closing control of the object (opening and closing door) is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory (opening and closing door) is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S519 or S521 are completed. After the process of S525 is executed, a normal pattern stop command indicating the normal pattern stop is set (S526). This general figure stop command is a command for notifying the normal symbol stop to the audio lamp control device 113 .

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203c (S604). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203c added in the process of S604, the normal pattern reserved ball number command is set (S605).

Normal figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1001) of main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal pattern reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the normal pattern reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the normal pattern reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

When the processing of S605 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S606). In addition, in the processing of S606, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the process of S606 and the second per random number table 202d are obtained based on the general pattern pre-determination result (S607), and the general pattern pre-determination result is based on the general pattern A winning information command is set (S608), and this process ends.

The normal figure winning prize information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the general pattern winning information command, it extracts the general pattern pre-determination result from the general pattern winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the general pattern winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the general pattern preliminary determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V passing time process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this V-passing process (S109). This V passing time processing (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and whether the passage of the game ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 is normal. This is a process for determining

In this V passage time processing (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 provided in the V passage channel 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 detects a game ball (S701). In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has not detected the game ball, that is, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S701: No), this processing exit. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected a game ball (S701: Yes), then the V passable period (Fig. 16 (b) to (c)) is determined (S702).

In the processing of S702, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small winning scenario (S702: No), an error command is set (S703), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if it is determined that it is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S702: Yes), the value of the acquired first hit type counter is read (S704 ). That is, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpot types (jackpot A , jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined as a jackpot A (15R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", a jackpot B (15R jackpot) (see FIG. 14(b)).

Next, the V flag 203f indicating the jackpot type read in S704 is set to ON (S705), and the V passage command is set (S706). After that, the value of the counter 203d during time reduction corresponding to the jackpot type and the game state is set (S707).

In this way, even during a small winning game with respect to the winning to the second variable winning device 650, by providing a period during which the winning is valid (normal) and a period during which the winning is not valid (abnormal), It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball outside the passable period, an error command is set without turning on the V flag 203f, and this process is terminated. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, the V flag 203f is not set to ON, so even if the game ball is illegally passed through the specific area during the small winning game, The jackpot game is not executed after the end. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area is normal, and a configuration for determining whether there is an abnormality (error) is used. configuration may be used.

For example, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can pass through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during one small winning game is one by controlling the operation of each component of the second variable winning device 650. is employed. Therefore, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small game, it may be determined to be abnormal.

In addition, in this embodiment, after it is determined that the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, it is determined whether the detection of the game ball (passing through the specific area) is within the passable period. Detection of a game ball outside the possible period (passing through a specific area) can be processed as an abnormality. It may be configured to determine whether the detection switch 650e5 has detected a game ball.

Furthermore, based on the detection result of the passing detection switch 650as for detecting the entry of the ball into the inflow port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the V detection switch 650e5 which is the specific area, during one small winning game In spite of the passing detection switch 650as not detecting the game ball, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball may be determined to be abnormal.

By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games such as causing game balls to stay in the V passage channel 650e3 and allowing the game balls to pass through a specific area within the passable period.

In addition, means for determining whether or not the current small winning game is a small winning that can pass through V is provided, and using the determination result, even if the small winning is impossible (difficult) to pass V A case where the detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball may be determined to be abnormal.

In addition, the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the game ball that first wins in the second variable winning device 650 after the small winning game is executed can win the V passage 650e3 as in the present embodiment. , it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

In other words, when a game ball is illegally tried to pass through the V detection switch 650e5, which is the specific area, the V detection switch is detected even though no ball is won in the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. When the 650e5 detects a game ball, it can be determined to be abnormal, and if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game, the V detection switch 650e5 detects two game balls. It becomes possible to determine that it is abnormal.

In addition, if the small winning game this time is a small winning game that cannot pass V, the game ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the V detection switch 650e5, so the V detection switch 650e5 is turned on. Although only one game ball passes, it can be determined as abnormal because the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball during a small winning game in which V cannot pass.

It should be noted that an error command may be set and output externally if the determination result of each abnormality determination process described above is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the error command may include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for easily determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is caused by an illegal game. If it is determined that the number of balls passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) is larger than that of the passing detection switch 650as), the possibility of illegal play is high, so priority information with a high priority is set, and priority information with a low priority is set. The abnormality in which it is determined that the ball passed through the specific area outside the passable period during the winning game may be caused by playing with the ball, so priority information with a low priority is set.

In this way, none of the abnormalities can occur in a proper game. can be preferentially notified, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of the abnormality can be performed smoothly.

It should be noted that all of the abnormality determination processes for passage of the game ball to the specific area may be combined, or some of them may be combined as appropriate.

Here, as a result of each abnormality determination process described above, an error command that is set when an abnormality is determined is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. 33), in the external output process (S1001), it is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the sound lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. and

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the process of S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 33), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the normal pattern reserved ball number command and normal pattern winning information command set in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34) and the small hit opening command set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the error command set in the V-passing process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

In addition, the external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by means of an external terminal board (not shown). there is

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After finishing the process of S1004, a small hit control process is executed (S1005). Details of the small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, although small hit control processing (S1005) is performed in main processing, you may perform in timer interruption processing.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64b associated with the first entrance 64a is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is started when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is set by the process of S524 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64b is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or S518 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S507). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first pattern display device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S517 or the process of S519 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or S514 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the initial setting processing (S901 in FIG. 32) The process of S1001 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33). This is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the device 65. FIG.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S209 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) or the processing of S1406 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 37) described later is executed, and it is determined whether the big winning scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (S1102), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g increases. It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1103). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is 1. determine whether

In the process of S1103, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the opening start (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1103: Yes), an opening command for jackpot is set (S1104), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1103: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (in the jackpot scenario a If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251 (S1105).

In the process of S1105, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the process of S1106. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is in an open state), then set the round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start ( S1107), this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is established (S1108). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls win after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is changed to the current round. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1109), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of S1108, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured such that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is updated (added) and an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value is executed. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have won in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) When closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and the jackpot scenario is not based when a predetermined number of prizes have been won. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both types of motion control are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description continues. In the processing of S1108, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not met (S1108: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round. (S1110).

In the process of S1110, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round (S1110: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the process of S1111. (the specific door solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning port 65a is closed), and the process ends. Incidentally, the determination process from S1105 to S1110 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1110, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the end of the round (S1110: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the interval. If it is the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the interval (S1112: Yes), the interval command is set (S1113), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: No), next, jackpot ending control processing (S1114) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1114). This jackpot ending control process (S1114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1201: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1202), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1201: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the ending (in the jackpot scenario a If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000 (S1203). In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1204), and then the jackpot The scenario counter 203g is reset to 0 (S1205). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended. Then, the process ends.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 36, small hit control processing (S1005) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit by the sound lamp control device 113, This is a process of controlling the operation of an opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening/closing the opening/closing piece 650b associated with the prize winning port 650a, and a switching valve solenoid 650c2 for rotating the switching valve 650b3 for switching the flow path.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S1301). Specifically, the processes of S402 and S403 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 27) are executed, and it is determined whether the small winning scenario is set. In the process of S1301, if the small winning scenario is not set (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if a small winning scenario is set (S1301: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h (S1302), and the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a small winning It is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the scenario (S1303). For example, when the small winning scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the value of the counter 203h is 1 Determine whether the

In the process of S1303, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the opening start (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1) (S1303: Yes), by the processing of S1304, the small A winning opening command is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. Here, at the opening of the small winning, the display mode indicating the start of the small winning game is set on the third symbol display device 81 one second before the opening timing of the opening/closing piece 650b regardless of the small winning type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the small winning type based on the difference in the length of the display mode of the opening. In addition, it may be constructed such that, when a small win is made, the presentation of the fusion pattern (the battle between the hero and the monster) is continuously displayed without displaying the opening presentation. By configuring in this way, since the player recognizes the start of the small winning game as the opening timing of the opening and closing piece 650b, it is possible to make it difficult to identify the small winning type.

On the other hand, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value that does not correspond to the start of opening (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1305. In the processing of S1305, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 of the small winning scenario (V passage passage 650e3 is opened) (S1305). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid ON (V passage passage 650e3 open) is 375, It is determined whether the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is 375 or not.

In the processing of S1305, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h turns on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: Yes), the processing of S1306 to turn on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (to open the V passage 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates downward). Then, the process proceeds to S1307.

On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid ON (if the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: No), the process of S1307 Move to

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of the small winning scenario switching valve solenoid OFF (V passage channel 650e3 closed) (S1307). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (V passage passage 650e3 closed) is 1000, It is determined whether the value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is 1000 or not.

In the process of S1307, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid OFF (if the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1000) (S1307: Yes), by the process of S1308 , the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off (to close the V passage 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned off so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates upward). Then, the process proceeds to S1309.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S1309). For example, when the small winning scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16(b)), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponding to the round start (round start) is 376, so the small winning scenario counter 203h Determine if the value is 376.

In the process of S1309, if the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the start of the round (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 376) (S1309: Yes), by the processing of S1310, the small Based on the winning scenario, the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be opened and closed (the opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned on so that the opening/closing piece 650b of the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state), and the process proceeds to S1311. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1309: No), the process proceeds to S1311.

In the processing of S1311, it is determined whether or not the round end condition is established (S1311). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) win in total while the second specific winning port 650a is open, it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is established (S1311: Yes), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is increased by 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control after the next time. there is

Here, the small winning scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small winning counter 203h and to execute the operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, like the big winning scenario described above. there is Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific prize winning port 650a and the round end condition is satisfied, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). In the case of (closing the second specific winning opening 650a), the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is configured to be updated to the value one before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed ( It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, operation control (for example, operation control for ending the round when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is not associated with the passage of time (update of the counter value) is performed based on the small winning scenario. It is possible to execute Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning port 650a, when a predetermined time has elapsed, operation control is performed based on the small winning scenario, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, operation control is not based on the small winning scenario. This eliminates the need to perform complicated control such as executing , thereby facilitating design and preventing a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not established (S1311: No), the process proceeds to S1313. In the processing of S1313, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 750) (S1313). In the process of S1313, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the process of S1313. (The opening/closing piece solenoid 650f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing piece 650b of the second specific winning port 650a is closed), and the process proceeds to S1315.

On the other hand, in the process of S1313, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the end of the round (S1313: No), the process proceeds to S1315.

In the process of S1315, a small winning ending control process (S1315) is executed. This small winning ending control process is the ending period in the small winning game, that is, the process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small winning game to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1314) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S1314). This small winning ending control process (S1314) is a process executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 36).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the small winning scenario a202g1, the counter value is 751) (S1401). In the processing of S1401, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1401: Yes), a small winning ending command is set (S1402), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1401: No), then the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the ending (small winning If it is scenario a202g1, it is determined whether the counter value is 1500 (S1403). In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1403: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small winning scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1403: Yes), the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared, and the small winning scenario counter 203h is reset to 0 ( S1404). Then, the process proceeds to S1405.

In S1405, it is determined whether the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405). In the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is not set to ON (S1405: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203f set in S705 of FIG. Set (S1406). Then, the V flag 203f is set to OFF (S1407), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game, the big hit based on the value of the first per type counter C2 acquired by the fluctuation of the small hit Although it is configured to determine the type, it is not limited to this, and is configured to determine the jackpot type by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. may

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of the main processing (Fig. 39 (see S1618 of )) is determined (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1615 in FIG. 39), it executes power-off processing in S1618. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1618 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1618. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), it will transfer to S1504 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1618 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S1618, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1506). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1618 is executed (see S1617 in FIG. 39). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1618 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1618 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1509) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1510), an interrupt Permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1510), interrupt permission is set. (S1511). Then, it shifts to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1509 is skipped is that when the process of S1508 is reached from S1504 via the process of S1506, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1601 was executed (S1601). If the time has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1612, the change display setting process of S1613, and the pseudo change setting process of S1614 in short cycles. By executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from failing to be received. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending ball number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen. The settings are sent as commands to the display controller 114 . In the pending ball number display update process, the process of lighting the pending lamp (Ds3) according to the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 223d is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 34 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1609, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

In the process of S1612, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1612). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1613). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1613, pseudo fluctuation setting processing is executed (S1614). Pseudo-fluctuation means that when the fluctuation of the normal design is newly started during the fluctuation of the special design, and when the fluctuation of the special design is stopped, the fluctuation of the special design starts and the fluctuation of the normal design. It is a variable performance that is executed to match the start timing. The pseudo variation setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but even after the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped, it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation is to be executed by the fusion symbol. is executed.

When the processing of S1614 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1617), and the power-off processing is executed (S1618). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1619), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1616), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1616: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1616: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1612). This command determination process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1612), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1701). When the variation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If no variation pattern command has been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the special symbol has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). Then, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), a pseudo fluctuation start setting process is executed (S1708), and this process ends. This pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. A process to be executed according to the design is executed.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708), first, it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101: Yes), since the pseudo fluctuation setting is set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i, as a process of setting the start of pseudo fluctuation, The processing of S2103 to S2107 is executed. In the process of S2103, the value of the production counter 223g is acquired (S2103), and the production type (continuation production or out of production, fluctuation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the value of the production counter 223g obtained Based on, a pseudo variation pattern is selected from the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18(b)) corresponding to the effect type (S2104). A display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2105). This display pseudo-fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-fluctuation pattern. After that, the pseudo change flag 223c is set to ON (S2106), and the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S2107). After that, this process ends. In the case of continuation, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the off pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is set by processing into the production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2101: No), the stop command for display is set (S2102), and this processing ends. The stop command for display set here is a command indicating the stop of the special symbol. Based on this command, the fusion pattern and the special figure auxiliary pattern are synchronously stopped and displayed (determined stop display).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the execution of the pseudo variation is set at the timing of stopping the special symbol (the timing of receiving the stop command), the start of the pseudo variation is set. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly continue the pseudo-variation, and to provide the player with a variation of the natural fusion effect.

Here, return to FIG. 40 and continue the description. In the process of S1707, if the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), next, it is determined whether or not the command for the number of normal chart pending balls has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). In the process of S1709, when the normal pattern reserved ball number command is received (S1709: Yes), the normal pattern reserved ball number counter corresponding to the received normal pattern reserved ball number command, the received normal pattern reserved ball number command is stored, and 1 is added to the number of retained balls counter 223j to update it (S1710). Specifically, from the received general pattern reserved ball number command, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (the number of times of holding variable display in the normal pattern M) is extracted, and this is the voice lamp control device Stored in the 113 normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. After that, set a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j (S1711), and finish this process. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display of reserved symbols is set in the display control device 114 based on the value of the reserved number counter 223j. In the configuration of the present embodiment, as already described above, when a specific condition is established, a pseudo variation is executed in a fusion symbol across variations in a plurality of normal symbols. In the meantime, in order to make it look as if it is 1 change, the display of the reserved pattern of the normal pattern is not subtracted (the effect of reducing (digesting) the “black circle pattern” is executed), and the actual number of reserved patterns of the normal pattern A difference occurs in the number of reserved symbols displayed. However, as will be described later, if there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the displayed number of reserved symbols, a special variation is set at the start of the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol. A short variation of pseudo-stopping in seconds is executed, the value of the pending number counter 223j is decremented at that timing, and the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are updated based on it. As a result, the difference can be corrected to a normal state, and the problem of making the player feel uncomfortable can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo-stop is made during the variation of the actual normal symbol. It may be configured to execute an effect of eliminating the suspension in which the difference is caused by changing by 1 per second.

Here, the normal pattern holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball passes through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67, or when the normal pattern lottery is performed. Each time gate passage is detected, or each time a normal symbol lottery is performed, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the normal symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1710. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, for example, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, through-gate passage is detected. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 at the time or the lottery of the normal symbol. Further, for example, when the process of S1711 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j is issued. set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the reserved number counter 223j is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the processing of S1709, if the normal pattern reserved ball number command has not been received (S1709: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1712). Then, when the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received (S1712: Yes), the general figure fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1713), and the general figure fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received general figure fluctuation pattern command ( S1714). After that, this process is terminated.

In the processing of S1712, if the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not the general pattern winning information command is received from the main controller 110 (S1715). Then, when the universal figure winning information command is received (S1715: Yes), the winning information based on the received universal figure winning information command is stored in the general figure winning information storage area 223a (S1716), and this process ends. . Here, the winning information includes information based on the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2.

In the processing of S1715, if the general pattern winning information command has not been received (S1715: No), it is determined whether the general pattern stop command has been received (S1717). When it is determined that the normal map stop command is received (S1717: Yes), the normal map stop command for display is set (S1718). This normal map stop command for display is a command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is time to stop the normal map. On the other hand, if it is determined that the general map stop command has not been received (S1717: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1717 ), the process ends. In the processing of S1719, for example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1613). This variable display setting process (S1613) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the various variation pattern commands received from the main controller 110, various variation pattern commands for display are generated and set. Further, when the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (see S1708 in FIG. 41) is executed.

In the variable display setting process (S1613), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1804. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S1801: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1802). The details of this variation pattern selection process (S1802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1802 is completed, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1803). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1804). Then, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, it is off) (S1804: No), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so The process proceeds to S1807. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is ON (S1804: Yes), normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1805). The details of this general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1805 is finished, based on the obtained normal pattern fluctuation pattern type, to generate a display normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114, and to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1806). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1807, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1807). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S1807: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process is ended, and the process of S1812 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1808). A stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbols in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is extracted (S1809).

Next, based on the stop symbols in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbols instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop symbols in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 are set. (S1810), and sets a stop type command for display (S1811). After that, the process of S1812 is executed. The stop type command for display is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop design of the middle design row of the fusion design.

In the processing of S1812, it is determined whether or not it is the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo continuous chart fluctuation (S1812). Pseudo continuous figure fluctuation is, when a difference occurs between the values of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the reserved number counter 223j, when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is set, 2 seconds It is a special variation pattern in which the normal pattern starts to vary again after the pseudo stop at . In the process of S1802, it is determined whether it is the timing of this pseudo stop. When it is determined that it is the timing of the pseudo stop (S1812: Yes), the value of the reservation number counter 223j is updated by subtracting 1 (S1813), and the values of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 223d and the reservation number counter 223j (S1814). After that, this process ends. By constructing in this manner, the number of pending games counter 223j is decremented by 1 at the timing of the pseudo stop, and one pending symbol is also consumed. Therefore, it is possible to correct the actual number of reservations and the displayed number of reservations. On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that it is not the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo Renpoku fluctuation (S1812: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1802) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1802). The fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, the variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S1901), and then in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command The variation pattern type is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1902).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON (S1903: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S1904). Next, set the end of the pseudo-variation, generate a display command indicating the end of the pseudo-variation, set (1905) to transmit the command to the display control device 114, and then move to the processing of S1906 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S1903, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1903: No), the processes of S1904 and S1905 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1906. In the processing of S1906, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1906). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern and the value of the production counter 223g, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a or the small winning variation pattern selection table 222c corresponding to the special symbol lottery result (S1907).

When the processing of S1907 is finished, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol of the variation is out (S1908). If the determination result of the special symbol of the variation is not out (that is, hit) (S1908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out (S1908: Yes), it is determined whether there is a hit in the next normal symbol 2 reserve (S1909). If there is no winning within the next two reserved symbols (S1909: No), this process is terminated. If there is a win in the next normal symbol 2 hold (S1909: Yes), set the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON (S1910: Yes), and set the continuous pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i for a maximum of 30 seconds ( After performing S1911), this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 44, normal figure fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1805) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805). This general pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

When the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, first, the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2001), then in the process of S1714 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), extracted from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command The general pattern variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2002). When the processing of S2002 is finished, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 and updated (S2003). After that, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (S2004). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (S2004: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (that is, whether the fusion symbol is performing pseudo-variation) (S2006). If it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is not set to ON (that is, the fusion pattern is not pseudo-varied) (S2006: No), then the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (that is , whether the execution start of the pseudo-variation is confirmed) (S2007).

When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2007: No), the value of the pending number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S2008). Here, at the timing of executing the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805), which is a process for starting a new variation of the normal symbol, the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol is not performed, and the start of the pseudo variation is also determined. If not, since the fusion pattern is also variably displayed correspondingly at the start timing of fluctuation of the normal pattern, the value of the pending number counter 223j is subtracted, and the normal displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is The number of symbols is also digested (deleted one) and updated.

It is determined whether or not the value of the reserved number counter 223j and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are equal (S2009). When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are different values (S2009: No), the pseudo-renfu diagram corresponding to the type of the extracted normal figure fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is set (S2011). After that, the process of S2012 is executed. This pseudo Renfu figure fluctuation pattern is provided corresponding to each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. , the variation production of the fusion symbol similar to the variation pattern of the corresponding normal symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, a display is executed in which the game temporarily stops after 2 seconds, then changes again for 1 second, and then stops again.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are the same (S2009: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained. , Based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern type and the value of the production counter 223g, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern type (fusion pattern fluctuation effect) is selected from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 222b (S2010). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S2004: Yes), and in the process of S2006, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2006: Yes), and, in the process of S2007, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2007: Yes), in the fluctuation period based on the acquired normal figure fluctuation pattern type, the second The variable display of the normal pattern auxiliary pattern displayed in the normal pattern display area Ds1 of the 3-pattern display device 81 is set (S2005), and then the process is terminated. In this way, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the fusion pattern, the fluctuation of the fusion pattern is not started in response to the start of the fluctuation of the new normal pattern, and the fluctuation is started only with the normal pattern auxiliary pattern. , it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo-variation of the fusion pattern becomes complicated.

Next, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614). This pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the pseudo fluctuation setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2201). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo-variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 has passed (S2202). . The variation time of the pseudo variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set in S1911 of FIG. 43 or S2209 or S2212 of FIG. 45, and if this variation time has not passed (S2202: No), this Terminate the process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation being executed has passed (S2202: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S2203), and the pseudo fluctuation is stopped by the stop type command A stop is set at the set stop symbol (a symbol displayed as a middle symbol in a pseudo variation) (S2204). Next, a display command indicating the stop of the pseudo-variation is set (S2205), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not set to ON in the process of S2201 (that is, it is set to OFF) (S2201: No), 5 seconds before the variation of the special symbol outside stops (S2206). If it is determined that it is not 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol outside stops (S2206: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbols that are out is stopped (S2206: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2207: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is not set to ON (that is, it is set to OFF) (S2207: No), it is determined whether there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 hold ( S2208). When it is determined that there is a hit within the next two reservations of the normal symbol (S2208: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2209). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2210), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next two holdings of the normal symbols (S2208: No), it is a period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed. (S2211). Here, the period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed is the variation of the currently varying normal symbols than the variation of the special symbols that are performing the variation. It is a period in which it can be discriminated that the fluctuation of the ordinary pattern which starts to fluctuate anew during the fluctuation of the special pattern continues to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special pattern which is currently fluctuating is stopped.

In the processing of S2211, when it is determined that the period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is not executed (S2211: No), this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped later than the timing when the variation of the special symbols is stopped is executed (S2211: Yes), the variation of the normal symbols being executed and the deviation pseudo variation In order to match the stop timing, the pseudo variation is set by the differential seconds t1 (see FIG. 10(a)) from the end of the variation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the variation of the normal symbol (S2212). ). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2213), and this processing is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, by combining the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 and displaying them together with the fusion symbol, the complicated game property is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. can be done. Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced in flow speed upstream of the first ball entrance 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol is hit by the crew member 660, so that the game ball is played by the shooting device. It is configured to increase the chances of winning the first ball entrance 65a even during the period when the ball is not launched.

Further, when the special symbol deviation variation is executed, the determination result in the two retentions of the normal symbols is discriminated, and if the winning ball is stored, the period is longer than the variation ends. Since the judgment result of being out is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special pattern can be connected with the variation of the fused pattern of one variation by the success of the next normal pattern, and can be produced.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 62. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2301), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2301) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2401). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2402). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2402, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2402, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. A predetermined amount of the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a out of the stored control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2403). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2404), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) (S2405), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2301) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Since high processing performance can be maintained, it is possible to easily execute diversified or complicated effects using the auxiliary effect section.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2401 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S2401. and the processing of S2402 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2403 to S2405 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2403 to S2405 without executing the processes of S2401 and S2402 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2302). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2303). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2303, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2304, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2305). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4502 in FIG. 60B).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 48(b) S2608) and simple display setting processing (see S2609 in FIG. 48(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2305, interrupt permission is set (S2306), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2306, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 48(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601). If it is off (S2601: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S2602) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2603) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process (S2602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2603), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2602), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2604). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2603) or the simple display setting processing (S2609). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2605). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2606). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2605), 23, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2607). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2607, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2601: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S2608) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S2609) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2604.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, the details of the command determination process (S2602), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2702). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2704), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2705) and returns to the processing of S2701.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2705) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2801).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2804), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2805)), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, the display data table buffer 233d is set by the process of S2801 The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process, and image data of sprites required in the set variable display data table are stored in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2803 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2704, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2706), If there is a display variation type command (S2706: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the stop type command process (S2707) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information (shown by the stop class command for display) is determined (S2901), and the stop class table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48(b) ) is executed, the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time is executed, and finally the stop symbol after the variable effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S2903), this stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2902. In the above-described task processing (S2604), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2903, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the process of S2706, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2708), If there is a command (S2708: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the win-related command process (S2709) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing. This win-related command processing includes the win-related commands (jackpot opening command for display, number of rounds for display command, final round command for display, jackpot interval command for display, jackpot ending command for display, display It is a process for executing a process corresponding to a small winning opening command for display, a small winning ending command for display, and a V passing command for display.

In the hit-related command process (S2709), first, in the unprocessed new command, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot opening command for display (S3001), and if there is a jackpot opening command for display (S3001: Yes) , the jackpot opening command process is executed (S3002), and the process proceeds to S3003.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S3002) will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). FIG. 52(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot opening command process (S3002). This jackpot opening command process (S3002) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot opening command process, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the big hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001: No), the process of S3002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3003. In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3003), and if there is a display round number command (S3003: Yes), the round number command process is executed. (S3004), and the process proceeds to S3005.

Details of the round number command processing (S3004) will now be described with reference to FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S3004). The number-of-rounds command process (S3004) is for executing the process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202). Then, based on the set number of rounds display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3205), the round number command processing is terminated, and the winning related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3003 that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands (S3003: No), the process of S3004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3005. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3005), and if there is a final round command for display (S3005: Yes), final round command processing is executed. (S3006), and the process proceeds to S3007.

Details of the final round command process (S3006) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the final round command processing (S3006). This final round command process (S3006) is for executing the process corresponding to the final round command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the final round command process, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3302). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), the final round command processing is terminated, and the winning-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3005 that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S3005: No), the process of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3007. In the processing of S3007, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3007), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S3007: Yes), jackpot interval command processing is executed. (S3008), and the process proceeds to S3009.

Here, with reference to FIG.53(b), the detail of big-hit interval command processing (S3008) is demonstrated. FIG.53(b) is a flowchart which shows a jackpot interval command process (S3008). This jackpot interval command process (S3008) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot interval command process, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and based on the jackpot interval display data table thus set, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the big hit interval command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the process of S3007, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S3007: No), the process of S3008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3009. In the process of S3009, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3009), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S3009: Yes), the jackpot ending command process is executed. (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command process (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending command process (S3010). This jackpot ending command process (S3010) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the jackpot ending command process, first, a jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3501). Thereafter, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3502). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the big hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3009 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S3009: No), the process of S3010 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3011. In the process of S3011, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small winning opening command for display (S3011), and if there is a small winning opening command for display (S3011: Yes), a small winning opening command The process is executed (S3012), and the process proceeds to S3013.

Here, with reference to FIG.54(b), the detail of a small hit opening command process (S3012) is demonstrated. FIG.54(b) is a flowchart which shows a small hit opening command process (S3012). This small winning opening command processing (S3012) is for executing the processing corresponding to the small winning opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning opening command process, first, the small winning opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the small winning opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and based on the set small winning opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3011 that there is no display small winning opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3011: No), the process of S3012 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3013. In the process of S3013, in the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting ending command for display (S3013), and if there is a small hitting ending command for display (S3013: Yes), a small hitting ending command The process is executed (S3014), and the process proceeds to S3015.

Here, with reference to Drawing 55 (a), the details of small hit ending command processing (S3014) are explained. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the small winning ending command process (S3014). This small hit ending command process (S3014) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

In the small winning ending command process, first, the small winning ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702). Then, based on the set small winning ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the small hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3013 that there is no display small winning ending command in the unprocessed new commands (S3013: No), the process of S3014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3015. In the process of S3015, it is determined whether or not there is a V-pass command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3015), and if there is a V-pass command for display (S3015: Yes), V-pass command processing is executed. (S3016), and the process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55(b), the details of the V passage command processing (S3016) will be described. S3015 is a flow chart showing V passing command processing (S3016). This V passing command processing (S3016) is for executing processing corresponding to the V passing command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V passing command processing, first, the V passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the V passing command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S3015 that there is no display V passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S3015: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the process of S2708, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pseudo start command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2710). If there is a pseudo start command (S2710: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation display process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the pseudo-variation display processing (S2711) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing pseudo-variation display processing. This pseudo-variation display process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the display pseudo-start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pseudo-variation display process, first, a pseudo-display data table of pseudo-variation patterns based on the stop type corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). After that, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902). Then, based on the set pseudo display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the winning related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the processing of S2710, if it is determined that there is no display pseudo start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2712). If there is an image change command (S2712: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the back image change command process (S2713) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing (S2713), first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S4001). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, back face B), the back face image discrimination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the back face image change command is turned on, and the other back faces are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . Then, if the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

In the task processing (S2604), if it is specified to display either back face A or back face B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination set in S4002 is performed. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the lapse of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2712, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2714). Otherwise (S2714: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the error command processing (S2715) will now be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no error command (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2716), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

In the process of S2701, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes ), the processing of S2702 to S2716 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2701 to S2716 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S2608) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 50(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2801. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2802, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, details of the display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4202), S4203-S4204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4301).

In task processing (S2604), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4204), or if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4203: No), then the process proceeds to S4205.

In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59(b) is a flow chart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4405), and this process ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In task processing, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S4206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4209: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S4210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S4211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4215), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2604), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the previous stop design determination flag set by S4215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4221), the processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the finalized display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S4216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4216: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2609) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the image of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image has ended. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, details of the transfer setting process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S4502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4501, that is, if it is turned off (S4501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4502).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred (S4601). S4601: Yes), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4602). In the processing of S4602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4602: Yes), the process proceeds to S4603. Also, as a result of the process of S4601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S4601: No), the process proceeds to S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S4603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S4603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4605), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2608 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61) (see S4501: No in FIG. 60A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2603) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S4701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Also, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4702: No), the processes of S4703 and S4704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4706).

In the process of S4706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4706 that the transfer process has not ended (S4706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4706: Yes), the process proceeds to S4707. Also, as a result of the process of S4705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4705: No), the process proceeds to S4707.

In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4707). is turned off (S4708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S4713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S4709).

If the back image change flag is on (S4709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

In the process of S4709, if the back image change flag is not ON but OFF (S4709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4709, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713). The determination in the process of S4713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4713 (S4713: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4713 (S4713: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S4714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S4715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the drawing process (S2606), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4801). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2604), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S4802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 48(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) that allows the ball to win a prize ), in which a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) that grants a privilege to the player when the ball passes through the variable ball entry means, a guidance state in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and a state in which the ball is difficult to pass through. A guide means (V-gate 650d) is provided which can be varied at predetermined intervals to and from the regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is won consecutively, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results has a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. there is

As a result, when a player wins a specific lottery result in succession, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous gaming state than when the player wins a specific lottery result alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play due to winning the lottery result.

In the above-described embodiment, when a specific lottery result (small hit A) is won continuously, that is, when a specific lottery result is consecutively won, the ball moves through the specific area. Although the configuration in which the small winning game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed is shown, if it is a configuration in which the advantageous privilege game is easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, in this embodiment Configurations other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, a configuration may be used in which an advantageous privilege game is likely to be executed when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order. In addition, as a predetermined order, a predetermined order such as a case where a specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is consecutively won multiple times, or a case where a specific lottery result and a loss are alternately repeated. includes winning multiple times in a particular lottery result. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special pattern is lost as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility that it will become easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Furthermore, in the case of winning consecutive small wins, the total time of the playing time of the small win game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small win among the consecutive small wins is the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operating cycle.

As a result, when small wins occur successively, the successive small wins do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operating cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings to the V-gate 650d which is operating in a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small winning games. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning game continuously, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small winning game alone, and wins the small winning continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small winning game and the variation time of the second special figure variation display among the continuous small winnings is the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d In contrast, the V gate 650d is configured to differ by at least the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state.

As a result, when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, the V gate 650d in the second small winning game is V The timing of causing the ball to flow down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the induced state, and when the player wins the small winning game continuously, the player wins the small winning game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than in the case where the game is played, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play the game due to consecutive small winnings.

As for the time to be different, it is desirable to make the difference longer than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state with respect to the integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. . As such a configuration, for example, when the operating period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is set to be shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second), By winning a small prize consecutively for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to make a difference of one operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the small winning game continues five times, among the small winning games that are continuously executed, at least one small winning game that can pass V is executed, so the game It is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous game state than the case of winning a single small win when the small win is won in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is not in an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small winning game, the time (1.5 seconds minute) When the different small winning game continues a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) (when the difference is made by one cycle or more of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d in total), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d It is possible to vary the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the small winning game. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous game state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the successively won small wins is executed, the successively won small wins are awarded to the player. It is configured to provide an advantageous game state for As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and to improve the operation of the game.

As the predetermined condition, it is shown that the number of reserved balls is seven in this embodiment, but other conditions may be set, and the number of reserved balls that satisfy the predetermined condition may be changed. Further, requirements other than the number of held balls may be set as the predetermined condition. For example, it may be set as the predetermined condition that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the predetermined lottery result and the game state is different from the normal game state. Alternatively, the predetermined condition may be defined as a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special symbols are changed 50 times) after a specific game state such as a jackpot game ends.

Even with such a configuration, the player will be motivated to play the game so as to satisfy the predetermined conditions, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won continuously, a small hit that can (easily) pass through a specific area is determined, and based on the determination result, a continuous small hit period And a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a variable display period of special symbols corresponding to the small hit. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small win is a small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area, and the second small win is a small win that allows the ball to pass through the specific area. In the case of possible (easy) small wins, as a production corresponding to the first small win, it is based on the fact that the current small win is an impossible (difficult) small win to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, continuous chance effect) based on the fact that the next small win is a small win in which the ball can (easily) pass through a specific area instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the performance based on the small win that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state (it is difficult), it is possible to suppress the performance that the player feels dissatisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the player gets bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small wins executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are consecutive, it is possible to provide a game state more advantageous than the case where the small wins are executed alone. , based on the fact that the small win is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured so as to be able to provide a game state more advantageous than when the small win is executed alone.

For example, based on the fact that a small win is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times, which is the upper limit number to be held and stored), a game state that is more advantageous than the case where a small win is executed alone is established. It may be configured so that it can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings.

In addition, based on the fact that small wins are executed a plurality of times along a predetermined order (for example, small wins and losses are executed alternately), it is more advantageous than the case where small wins are executed independently. game state can be provided. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent winning of small winnings. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order by combining small hits and losses, it is possible to provide a game state advantageous to the player even when the result is a loss as a result of lottery of special symbols a plurality of times. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, based on the fact that small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, small hits and losses are alternately executed), it is more advantageous than the case where small hits are executed alone game state can be provided, similar to the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the loss A special fluctuation time may be set to , and the timing at which a plurality of small wins are executed and the opening timing of the guidance means may be made different. As a result, even if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, there remains a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state will be provided, aside from the result of the lottery of the special symbols. effective.

In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbols corresponding to the small win and the special variation of the special symbols corresponding to the loss. As a result, when the small hits are consecutive and when the small hits are executed multiple times along a predetermined order (for example, when the small hits are alternately executed), special special effects during the continuous production It is possible to execute the same effect as the symbol variation effect, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the variation pattern selection table 202c for loss referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 5.5 seconds when the number of entering balls retained and stored is 5 to 6. A special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for outliers) is defined. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of entered balls that are retained and stored decreases from 7 to 6 to 5, special wins are made in the order of small win A (first time) → miss → small win A (second time). When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the fluctuation display of the loss (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small win A (5.5 seconds) ) After that, a small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small winning A is different from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small winning A of the V gate 650d. The timing is different by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds) from the operating cycle.

In the above-described example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is shown to be unified between the case of the lottery result of the special symbol and the case of the small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of the loss (Variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time that is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds). By doing so, even if the deviation variation is executed during the small hit as in the above example, the time required for the deviation variation to change the deviation (variation time of special symbols and small winning game time ) can be unified with Therefore, the same continuous performance time can be secured in the case where the lottery results of the special symbols are in the order of small win A→loss→small win A and the case where the small win A is won three times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by standardizing the continuous effects.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous performance is a small hit or a loss, the player can have expectations until the end of the continuous performance. There is

As mentioned above, the illustrated configuration shows a case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out, but it is not limited to it. It may be a small hit (small hit B to C) where B is not set. In this case, it is preferable to unify the small winning game times of the small winnings B to C with the small winning A to achieve commonality of the continuous effect.

Further, in this embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hit is executed continuously (when the small hit is executed a plurality of times), the small hit is made independently. Although it is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, other configurations may be used. It is also possible to change the opening period and the opening timing, change the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (induction means), and change the operation timing of the stopper 650c.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small wins is a small win that can pass V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small wins can pass through the V when the small win is executed a plurality of times. . Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in the first embodiment.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the crew member 660, and during the fluctuation period of the normal design, the speed of flowing down (the speed of moving vertically downward in the game area) is delayed to make it easy to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64a in accordance with the period during which the normal pattern wins. In the second embodiment, a rotation holding device 690 is arranged below the through gate 67 instead of the crew member 660 . Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotation holding member 690 includes a rotating portion 690c arranged at a position where a first recessed portion 690a and a second recessed portion 690b which can enter a game ball face each other via a central axis 690z, and the rotating portion 690c from both left and right sides. Side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged at positions rotatable with a game ball entering (held) in the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged with openings so that game balls can enter the first concave portion 690a or the second concave portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c from above. Further, the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are not arranged below the rotating portion 690c, and when the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c is in the lower position, the ball is entered. It is possible to make the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entrance 64a.

The rotating portion 690a is configured to rotate clockwise in a front view by a rotating motor (not shown) by a rotating shaft 690z. In this case, it is configured at a speed of one rotation in 20 seconds, and when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the first concave portion 690a or the second concave portion 690b, the normal pattern hit variation time is 10 seconds. Therefore, it is configured to be discharged from below in accordance with the timing. As in the first embodiment, the ejected game ball collides with the nail KG, is delayed in flowing down, is sorted to the right or left of the nail KG, and enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is configured. In this embodiment, when the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c does not face upward, the ball flows downward without entering the ball. It may be configured to be held by the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 and wait until the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b rotates upward. Further, two recesses into which the game ball can enter may be further provided to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the recess and enters the rotating portion 690c. Also, a plurality of rotation holding members 690 similar to those of the second embodiment may be arranged to hold a plurality of game balls in the game area, thereby delaying the flow down.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-67. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a starting gate 680 is arranged between the croon member 660 and the first ball-entering device 64 (above the nail KG), unlike the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start gate 680 is a starting switch for starting a normal symbol winning game when the normal symbol winning is achieved. The determination result of the normal design is winning, and when the variation time elapses and the game ball is passed through the start gate 680 after the winning design is stopped and displayed, the winning game of the normal design is started. In addition, since the winning game of normal symbols to be started is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

0.5 seconds after passing through the start gate 680, the opening/closing door of the first ball-entering device 64 is opened to allow the ball to enter the first ball-entering port 64a. The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 680 collides with the nail KG, is distributed in the lateral direction of the nail KG, and flows down to the first ball entering device 64 . The period required from passing through the start gate 680 to being guided to the first ball-entering device 64 is approximately 0.6 seconds to 1 second, and is the period during which the first ball-entering device 64 is in the open state. , so that the game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 can easily enter the first ball entrance 64a.

In the present embodiment, the nail KG is arranged below the start gate 680 so as to delay the opening of the first ball entrance 64a. A rotation holding member, a clown member, or the like as in the second embodiment may be arranged, or the game ball may be configured to flow down while contacting a rubber member or the like that reduces the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the opening period of the normal symbol winning game may be set as long as 5 seconds, and a delay member may be arranged in accordance with the period.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a normal symbol hit flag 203i is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol winning flag 203i is a flag indicating that the right to start a normal symbol winning game has been granted. When the game ball is passed through the start gate 680 after the normal symbol winning flag 203i is set to ON, the normal symbol winning game is started. It should be noted that this normal symbol per flag 203i is normal symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see FIG. 66), which is one process in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, in the process of S527 , It is set to ON when the normal pattern hit variation period ends. In addition, in the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 of the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is the normal symbol. The difference is that it is changed to the variation process 2 (see FIG. 66). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process 2 (S111). In the normal symbol variation process 2 (S111) in the third embodiment, the difference is that the processes of S519 and S521 are deleted and the process of S527 is added to the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 24). do. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of S519 and the processing of S521 (see FIG. 24) are processing for setting the opening of the first ball entrance device 64 (setting a winning game with normal symbols). Since the winning of the normal symbols is started when passing through, it is deleted and set so as to be set when passing through the start gate 680 (see S1458 and S1460 in FIG. 67). In the process of S527, the normal symbol winning flag 203i is set to ON, and when the game ball passes through the start gate 680, the normal symbol winning game is started. In addition, the process of S527 is a case where it is determined that the normal symbol variation time set in the process of S522 has passed, and further, it is determined that the lottery result is a hit in the process of S524. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 (S1020), which is one process in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (S1020). The main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is that the electric accessary product opening/closing processing (S1006) in the main processing (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment is the electric accessary product opening/closing processing 2. (S1020) is different. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the electric accessary product opening/closing process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 67), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag 203i is on (S1451). When the normal symbol hit flag 203i is off (S1451: No), whether the electric accessory (corresponding to the opening/closing door of the first ball entry device 64) is in the opening/closing operation (that is, opening or closing to opening operation). (S1452). When the electric accessory is in operation (S1452: Yes), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (S1453). When it is determined that the opening time has passed (S1453: Yes), the opening/closing operation corresponding to the electric accessory is set (S1454). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined No in the processing of S1452 and S1453, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1451, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit flag 203i is ON (S1451: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 680 (S1455). If it is determined that the starting gate 680 has not been passed (S1455: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that the start gate 680 is passed (S1455: Yes), the normal symbol per flag 203i is set to ON (S1456), and the time saving medium counter 203d is 1 or more, That is, it is determined whether or not it is during working hours (S1457). When it is determined that it is during the time saving (S1457: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the jackpot game (S1458). If the jackpot is not in progress, the normal symbol winning period is set to 2 seconds, and the interval is set to 2 times at 1 second (S1459). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1457, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S1457: No), or when it is determined in the process of S1458 that it is during the special symbol jackpot game, the open period is once every 2 seconds. set to Note that the period until opening is started (opening period) is set to 0.5 seconds regardless of the state.

In this way, since the winning of the normal symbols is started when it passes through the start gate 680, the first ball entrance 64 can be opened even to the player who has stopped shooting the game balls during the fluctuation of the normal symbols. It is possible to suppress missing the opportunity to enter the ball into the ball and facilitate playing the game.

In addition, in the example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the start gate 680 is arranged at a position where the game ball can easily pass without providing the clown member 660 or the like, and the game ball is fired early. may be configured to pass through.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 86. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured not to store reserved balls for special symbols, but the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to store reserved balls for special symbols. This is the difference from the first embodiment. Elements and configurations that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, an example of the display contents of the fusion symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the reserved ball of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment is stored will be described. . FIG. 69 shows the timing (period) at which each variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed when three normal symbol reserved balls are stored and one special symbol reserved ball is stored, It is the timing chart which showed the timing (period) to which a fusion pattern variably displays corresponding to it.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, in synchronism with the variation start timing of normal symbols, variable display of fusion symbols is started (see FIG. 6(a)). As shown in the first embodiment, in the case of a normal pattern hit, the fusion pattern is displayed in a reach display mode (see FIG. 6(b)), and the normal pattern hit game execution period (normal pattern hit period ), as shown in FIG. 7(a), the ready-to-win display mode is displayed during the period in which the first ball entrance 64a is open, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, special Synchronously with the start of the variable display of the symbols, the display mode of super reach is displayed with the fusion symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 69, two game balls are entered into the first ball entrance 64a during the winning period of normal symbols in which the first ball entrance 64a is open, and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. It shows an example when During the special symbol variation display period (during special symbol variation A), the normal symbol hit period ends, and among the normal symbol retention balls, the variation display corresponding to the first ball is the special symbol variation display. It is started during the period being performed (the period during which special figure variation A is being performed). In this case, the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed only in the blinking display portion, and the auxiliary normal symbol is variably displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the fusion symbol is simulated even after the variation period of the special symbol ends five seconds before the start of the variation and the end timing of the variation display. It is configured to determine whether to perform variable display (effect such as shaking). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation at the start of the variation of the special symbol and at the end of the variation display. In the fourth embodiment, the condition for pseudo-fluctuation of the fusion symbol is limited to the case where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored. It is configured so that it cannot be By configuring in this way, the fluctuation of the fusion design corresponding to the special design (the fluctuation of the fusion design showing the lottery result of the special design) can be executed preferentially, and is a direct opportunity to start the big hit game. The notification corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol can be performed by the fusion symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the first game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, since the reserved ball with the special symbol is not yet stored, the special symbol fluctuates. At the variation timing at the start (when the variation of the special figure variation A starts), after the variation, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo variation of the fusion symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, when the lottery result in the variation of the special symbol (special symbol variation A) is out, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, and the normal symbol is hit within 2 reservations. If the hold that becomes is stored, the execution of pseudo variation is set (as a reservation set after the end of the special symbol variation time). By constructing in this way, if the reserved balls that will win the normal symbols are stored in the second reserve, the first ball entrance 64a will be immediately opened and the special symbols will be opened even after the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols. Even if the variation of is started (timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a), the previous variation of the fusion symbol is continuously executed in the pseudo variation, so in connection with the variation, next The fusion pattern is varied in synchronism with the started special pattern variation to reduce the number of variations of the fusion pattern for notifying the result of the winning lottery, thereby making the player think that the winning probability is high. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the start of the special symbol variation (at the start of the special symbol variation B), no winning retention is stored in the 2 retentions of the normal symbols, so the pseudo variation is not set. At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special symbol stops (the timing when the fluctuation period of the special fluctuation B has passed), it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo fluctuation. In addition to the execution of the determination similar to that at the start of variation, in a state in which the reserved ball of the special design is not stored, if the holding to be a win is not stored in the 2 holdings of the normal design, the special design. It is discriminated whether or not the variation of the normal symbol is continued even after the is stopped, and when it is continuously performed, the pseudo variation of the fused symbol is set until the timing when the variation is finished. In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the special figure variation A stops varying, the held ball corresponding to the special figure variation B is stored, so the pseudo variation is not set and the fusion symbol is also displayed in the reach display mode. The medium pattern is stop-displayed in a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern (left and right stop patterns), and the player is notified that the lottery result is lost.

When the variation of the special figure variation A stops, the variation display of the fusion symbol that has been stop-displayed is started in synchronization with the start of the variation of the special figure variation B. When the fusion pattern starts to change, each pattern row is scrolled in the vertical direction at a low speed (speed at which each pattern is visible), and then scrolled at high speed (at a speed at which each pattern is not visible). be. When the special symbols start to fluctuate, it is determined whether or not to set a pseudo-fluctuation in the same manner as in the special fluctuation A. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the special figure fluctuation B starts to fluctuate, the reserved ball of the special pattern is not stored, but the held ball that will be hit within the two reservations of the normal symbol is not stored. Therefore, no pseudo-variation is set.

In the fluctuation display of the fusion design corresponding to the special figure fluctuation A, it is displayed from the start of super reach (see FIG. 7 (b)), but in the fluctuation display of the fusion design corresponding to the special figure fluctuation B, the fusion design is stopped. As described above, the variable display is started from the state, and after the reach display is displayed, a specific change pattern is set in which the super reach display mode is displayed. In this case, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by the main controller 110 side, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a of the voice ramp control device 113 includes whether the special symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation executed by the ball on hold. The fluctuation pattern of the fusion symbol in which the start of super reach is executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time that can be selected in correspondence with whether or not (selected when it starts), and the fusion pattern is started to fluctuate from the state in which it is stopped, and the fluctuation pattern of the fusion pattern to be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result through the reach display mode is set. It is

By configuring in this way, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts to fluctuate due to the holding ball, and when the fluctuation starts at the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64a, the fusion that has been performed so far It is possible to variably display corresponding fused patterns according to the varying state of the patterns (difference between being displayed in a ready-to-win state and being displayed in a stopped state), thereby suppressing the inconvenience of making a player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, the timing at which the fusion pattern starts to change can be matched with the timing at which the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, or the special pattern can start to fluctuate. Since it is possible to match the timing to stop the variation of the normal symbols or to match the timing to stop the variation of the special symbols, the player can be interested in the variation display of the fusion symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variation contents of the fusion symbol in the case where the holding balls that will win in the two holdings of the normal symbols are stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the fusion symbol in the case where the holding balls that will hit in the two holdings of the normal symbols are stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol (at the start of the variation of the special symbol variation C). be. In the example shown in FIG. 70, three held balls are stored in the normal symbol, and the second held ball stored is stored as a winning ball. The variation of the normal symbol during the variation (during the variation of the special figure variation C) is a hit, and when the first ball entrance 64a is opened, two game balls enter the first ball entrance 64a, It is an example showing the fluctuation mode of the fusion symbol in the case where one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. At the start of the variation of the special figure variation C, the retained ball that will be hit in the 2 retentions of the normal symbols is stored, and at the start of the variation (at the start of the variation of the special figure variation C), the retained ball of the special symbol is still stored. (Even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a continuously, before the game ball that entered later is discriminated, the special symbol variation start setting process is performed. Executed), so after the end of the special figure fluctuation C, a maximum of 30 seconds of pseudo fluctuation is set to be executed in the fusion design. On the other hand, after the special symbol variation start setting is performed (pseudo variation start setting (including the process of turning on the pseudo setting flag 223h)), the special symbol corresponding to the special figure variation D from the main controller 110 When the hold command is received, the set start setting of the pseudo fluctuation is canceled (the process of setting the pseudo setting flag 223h to off) is executed.

In the variation of the fusion pattern corresponding to the special figure variation C, the display mode from the start of the super reach is displayed in the fusion design in the same manner as the special figure variation A explained in FIG. At the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation C passes (the fluctuation period ends), the fluctuation display of the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed. Since the lottery result of the special figure variation C shows an example in which the result is lost, the fusion pattern is stopped and displayed in the medium pattern row, which is different from the ready-to-win pattern indicating that the lottery result is lost. (See FIG. 8(a)). Judgment as to whether the pseudo-variation is performed at the end timing of the variation time of the special figure variation C is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. No settings are executed.

Next, based on the variation start timing of the special figure variation D, determination is performed whether to set the pseudo variation, and in the example shown in FIG. Since the holding ball is stored, it is set so that the pseudo variation of maximum 30 seconds is executed after the end of the special figure variation D. In this case, since the winning game corresponding to the holding 2 of the normal design is executed in the fluctuation period (including the pseudo fluctuation period) of the fusion design corresponding to the special design fluctuation D, the third design is displayed in the fluctuation period of the fusion design. The device 81 is set to display a notice display mode for notifying in advance that a normal symbol winning game will be executed (open notice is set). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(b), 3 seconds before the winning game of the normal symbol, the characters "Fire the game ball and hold the charge chance!" ) is set to be displayed in the front layer than ). The advance notice display mode shown in FIG. 72(b) is a display mode executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, and notifies that the number of held balls will increase when game balls are shot. In addition, after the special symbol variation period is over, during the period in which the pseudo variation is being executed (the state in which there is no special symbol reserved ball), game balls are shot as shown in FIG. 72(a). Then, as a notice display mode indicating that the fused pattern will change again, a display mode of "Re-change chance by shooting a game ball!" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70, when the advance notice display mode is set over the period from the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol to the pseudo fluctuation period, the notice display mode is switched and displayed at the timing of the pseudo fluctuation. It is

By constructing in this way, even for a player who has stopped shooting game balls during the fluctuation period of the fusion pattern, the normal pattern wins and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is being executed, it is set so as to display the notice display mode when the normal symbol hits. If the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (four in this embodiment), the advance notice display mode may not be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the problem of causing the player to wastefully shoot the game ball and thus impairing the profit.

In this embodiment, the notice display mode is switched between the special symbol fluctuation period and the stop period. It may be configured to switch the advance notice display mode by and. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that it is a period in which the game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64a, so that the player can enter the first ball entrance 64a. can raise expectations for

At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation D ends, it is determined whether to execute the setting of the pseudo fluctuation, and since the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is already executed at the start of the fluctuation, up to 30 based on the setting A second pseudo-variation (see FIG. 8(b)) is performed. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64a, the re-variation of the fusion symbol is started based on the new start of variation of the special symbol. be. On the other hand, even if the opening period of the normal symbol (including the ball sweeping period, which is the period from when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a until it is detected by the detection switch) ends, the first ball entrance 64a When the game ball is not detected by the detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered, the pseudo fluctuation (variation display) of the fusion symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display. It should be noted that, similar to the special figure variation B, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation D starts scrolling from the state where the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed, and goes through the reach display form, and then the super reach display form. is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example of super reach is explained for the variable display of special symbols. It may be configured in any manner.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and when the reserved ball is not stored, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is generated. Since it is configured to switch and set the variation mode in the case where the variation (scroll display) is switched to the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol and displayed, the fusion symbol starts the variation display. A series of effects until notifying whether or not it becomes a hit (judgment result of a special pattern) can be executed in the same flow every time (scroll display starts from the stop state of the fusion pattern, and through the reach display mode , The middle pattern that is the same as the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and the winning is announced with a double eye). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, when the reserved ball of the special pattern is stored, if the lottery result for the variation is out, the fusion pattern is variably displayed over the fluctuation period of the special pattern stored in the reserved ball. It may be configured to produce a variable display of 1. By constructing in this way, the number of times the game is stopped due to the failure of the fused symbols can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency of being notified of winning is higher than the actual probability of winning.

In addition, it may be constructed such that one variation of the fusion symbol is performed over a period in which a plurality of continuous variation displays of the normal symbols are performed. By constructing in this way, by connecting the fluctuation time up to the ball of the winning normal pattern and making it within one fluctuation of the fusion pattern, the frequency of stopping due to the loss of the fusion pattern can be reduced. Furthermore, it may be constructed so that the variation time corresponding to the deviation of the normal symbol can be shortened so that a plurality of deviation variations can be completed in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72, display modes displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72(a) is a diagram showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is a normal symbol display area Ds4 below the normal symbol display area Ds1 with respect to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. However, the special figure reservation real number display area Ds5 is added to the lower part of the special symbol display area Ds2, and the normal figure reservation number display area Ds3 is changed to the fusion reservation number display area Ds6, which is different from the first embodiment do. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

The normal pattern reserved actual number display region Ds4 is a display region in which a notification mode indicating the reserved number of normal symbols is displayed. In this embodiment, "a" if the number of reservations is 0, "b" if the number of reservations is 1, "c" if the number of reservations is 2, and the number of reservations is It is configured such that "d" is displayed when the number is 3, and "e" is displayed when the number of reserved items is 4 (see FIG. 71(b)). In this way, the symbols are displayed so that the actual reserved number of normal symbols is difficult for the player to understand at a glance. By configuring in this way, in the present embodiment, by executing pseudo-variation etc., there may be cases where it is different from the pending number displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6 described later, but it is different This can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player can play while recognizing the reserved number displayed in the merged reserved number display area Ds6 as the actual reserved number.

Further, in the special figure real reserved number display area Ds5, the reserved number of special symbols is displayed. In the display shown here, the number of pending figures is reported in the same display form as that displayed in the above-described normal figure pending actual number display area Ds4. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the actual number of reserved special symbols, and the fused symbols fluctuating by scrolling display is either a variable display corresponding to the normal symbols, or a special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult to understand whether the variable display corresponds to the pattern. Therefore, the player can concentrate only on the result notified by the fusion pattern, and can play the game without understanding the complicated game characteristics.

Here, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 will be described with reference to FIG. 71(b). Only based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the suspension is newly stored, the "black circle" pattern is displayed in the fusion suspension number display area Ds6, and the right (suspension) to variably display the fusion pattern is granted. You will be notified that it is stored. Up to four 'black circle' patterns can be displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and it is structured so as to notify that the number of times of reservation in which the fusion pattern fluctuates is four times. In the state where the "black circle" pattern is displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, that is, in the state where the reservation of the normal pattern is stored, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the fluctuation of the special pattern. Then, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the reserved symbol of the first stored reserved symbol (the reserved symbol with the earliest change order) is changed as shown in FIG. 71(b). displayed (eg, red, etc.). By configuring in this way, after the special symbol during variation stops varying, the suspended special symbol variation is started, but the suspended symbol displayed at that timing is digested (the displayed front row The reserved pattern can be erased, and the display position of the reserved pattern displayed after the next can be slid and displayed. In addition, when the reserved pattern that has already been changed and displayed is displayed, the reserved pattern that is displayed in the non-variable state ("black circle" pattern) that is displayed next is changed and displayed. . If there is no reserved pattern to be displayed next, a newly changed reserved pattern is displayed. Similarly, when the reserve pattern is not displayed in the fusion reserve number display area Ds6 and the reserve of the special pattern is stored, the newly variable reserve pattern is similarly displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to update (digest) and display the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 in accordance with the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, thereby suppressing the player's sense of incongruity. We can provide a game that has been done. Furthermore, when a reserved ball is stored as a special symbol, the colors of the reserved symbols are displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation for a big win. In this embodiment, since the lottery probability of winning the special symbol is set higher than the probability of winning the normal symbol, the actual expectation of the big winning is also high. In this embodiment, the colors of the reserved symbols are configured to be variable. is high, blue is low, etc.).

In addition, by configuring in this way, there is a difference between the actual reserved number of normal symbols and the reserved number displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, but when the difference occurs, the normal pattern deviation fluctuation Pseudo-continuous variation accompanied by pseudo-stop is executed by the variation of the fused symbols variably displayed corresponding to, and the suspended symbols displayed in the fusion-held number display area Ds6 are digested at the timing of re-fluctuation after the pseudo-stop timing. By doing so, it is possible to match the difference in the number of reserved items.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of reservations displayed in the fusion reservation number display area Ds6 was set to a maximum of 4, but not limited to that, the actual normal symbol as the upper limit number of 8, each reservation number of special symbols It may be configured to correspond and notify. In this case, the reserved symbols in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 displayed at the timing when the special symbols fluctuate and the timing when the normal symbols start to fluctuate may be updated.

FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), as described above, are diagrams showing an example of the advance notice display mode in the case where the normal symbol wins during the special symbol variation period (including the pseudo-variation period). Since it is as described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Note that the differences in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 73(b). Since other points are the same as in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j and a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k are added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2. , stop type selection counter C3, and each value of small hit type counter CS3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area 203a, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, determination such as special symbol lottery is performed. .

When data is shifted from the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3, CS3 is obtained according to the starting winning, those values are included. A special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 . When the special figure winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113, from the special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command), each counter C1 ~ C3, Each value of CS3 is extracted and stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k of the RAM 223 as special figure winning information.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is a variable display of a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of variable display) up to 4 times. The value N of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set to zero as an initial value, and the maximum value is obtained each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the number of special symbol reserved balls increases. 1 is added up to 4 (see S424 in FIG. 76), and 1 is subtracted each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 75).

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), if the value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variation display in the special symbol N) is less than 4, the first random number Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j (Fig. 76 of S426). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 4 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), nothing is newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j. (S423 in FIG. 76: No).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S224 in FIG. 75 and S425 in FIG. 76). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed, the special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls itself in the variable display. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special figure pending ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the special figure reservation ball number command to be received next.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command, and notifies the number of reserved balls of the special figure to the display control device 114 every time the number of reserved balls changes. Send a command for the number of pending pitches for display. The display control device 114 displays the special figure reserved ball number design in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls of the special figure notified by this display reserved ball number command. indicate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73(b), the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73(b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a special figure winning information storage area 223k, a special figure reservation ball number counter 223m, a special figure pseudo fluctuation flag 223p and a special figure pseudo setting A flag 223q has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure winning information storage area 223k has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the And from each value of the small win type counter CS3, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, big win or small win type in case of big win or small win, variation pattern) Is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by the special figure winning information command (jackpot, losing reach, or losing winning information command) be notified.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the special figure winning information command is received, various information notified by the special figure winning information command (win or not, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, variation pattern) It is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110, is a special symbol fluctuation effect (variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the special figure reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is counted by the special figure reserved ball number counter is designed to manage

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. When it is done, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k after addition or subtraction.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110 from the special figure reserved ball number command. Then, it is stored in the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m (see S1736 in FIG. 81). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is updated, the special symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203k.

The value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is used for the display of the special figure reserved ball number design in the third design display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the special figure reserved ball number command in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m, and the special figure reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223m, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 The number of reserved balls Drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the special symbol reservation real number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of special symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the illustration and description of the different control processing will be provided.

Timer interrupt processing 2 executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interrupt process 2. As shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process 2 (FIG. 74), the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) in contrast to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The difference is that the starting winning process (S105) is added after the second variation process. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. The details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S120). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 75, S104) in the fourth embodiment, the processing of S203 to S204 is the processing of S221 to S225 in contrast to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 25, S104) in the first embodiment. The difference is that it has been changed to As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203k (number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired ( S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is greater than 0 (S222), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is not 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S223), and changed by calculation. A special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set (S224). The special figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k from the special figure reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special figure reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special symbol reserved ball number command by the processing of S224, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203j are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 74) to determine whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning). Secondly, it is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (S421: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is obtained (S422). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64a (S421: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64a, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4. Otherwise (S423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64a (S421: Yes) and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203k is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure reservation ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k from the special figure reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special figure reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special figure pending ball number command by the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second Each value of the hit random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203 (S426). . In addition, in the process of S426, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S427 is executed.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S426 is determined to be a big win when the variation starts. Whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state is discriminated from the judgment result of the reserved balls stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, and the judgment is made. Performed in advance (read-ahead determination of pass/fail determination results). In the process of S427, not only the success/failure determination result but also the stop type and variation pattern are discriminated and stored in the corresponding reserve area of the special symbol reserve ball storage area 203j.

In the process of S427, when it is determined that the game is a big win (S427: Yes), a big win prize information command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S428). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is super reach, the corresponding jackpot prize information command is set. On the other hand, in the process of S427, when it is determined that it is lost (S427: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S429). In the process of S429, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super ready-to-win (S429: Yes), a win-win winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S430). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern different from the super ready-to-win (S429: No), a missed winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S431). The winning information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can identify the type of variation pattern to be selected.

When the winning information command is set, it is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. FIG. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the illustration and description of the different control processing will be provided.

Main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process 2. As shown in FIG. In main processing 2 (FIG. 77), command determination processing (S1612) is changed to command determination processing 2 (S1620) in contrast to main processing (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and variable display setting processing (S1613) is changed to command determination processing 2 (S1620). It is different in that it is changed to the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1630) and the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614) is changed to the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of command determination process 2 (S1620), change display setting process 2 (S1630), and pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1620) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 2 (S1620). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S1620) in the fourth embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 40, S1612) in the first embodiment in that the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708) is the pseudo fluctuation start setting process. 2 (S1720), the processing of S1709 to S1711 is changed to the processing of S1729 to S1730, and the processing of S1715 to S1716 is changed to the processing of S1731 to S1732. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1707, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 is executed (S1720), and this process ends. This pseudo-fluctuation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. (Refer to FIG. 8(b)) is executed by the fusion symbol.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S1720) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S2120 is added to the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment, and S2120 and S2107 The difference is that the process of S2102 is executed after the process of . As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (that is, if the pseudo fluctuation setting is not executed) (S2101: No), the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop is executed ( S2120), this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 80, the pseudo setting processing at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120). In the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (FIG. 80, S2120), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to stop fluctuation is out of the special symbol (S2121). If it is determined that the special symbol is hit (S2121: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined to be out of the special symbol (S2121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the number of special symbols reserved balls, that is, the value of the number of special symbols reserved balls counter 223m is 0 (S2122 ).

In the processing of S2122, if the value of the number of special figure reserved balls is not 0, that is, if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S2122: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Here, in this embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special design is stored, the special design is continuously changed after the special design is stopped. , setting of pseudo fluctuations, etc. are not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number of special figure reserved balls is 0 (S2122: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 reserved (S2123). If it is determined that there is a hit within the next two holdings of the normal symbols (S2123: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2124). Next, the process proceeds to S2127. In this way, in a state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, if the result of the determination of whether the special symbol to be stopped is also out, the fusion symbol is also stopped in a mode of notifying the loss, but two of the normal symbols are stopped. When there is a win in the reserve, until then, by extending the fixed stop in the losing mode with a pseudo-variation, it is possible to integrate and display the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol. . As a result, the frequency of stop display due to misalignment of the notification result of the fusion symbol can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next two reservations of the normal symbols (S2123: No), it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed. (S2125). Here, the period during which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is executed is the variation of the currently varying normal symbols than the variation of the special symbols that are performing the variation. It is a period in which it can be discriminated that the fluctuation of the ordinary pattern which starts to fluctuate anew during the fluctuation of the special pattern continues to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special pattern which is currently fluctuating is stopped.

In the processing of S2125, when it is determined that the period in which the variation of the normal symbols to be stopped after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols is not executed (S2125: No), this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbol that stops after the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol is executed (S2125: Yes), the pseudo variation setting process of the first embodiment (Fig. 45 , S1614), so that the variation of the normal symbol during execution and the stop timing of the pseudo variation are coincident, the variation of the normal symbol is changed after the variation of the special symbol being executed is completed. t1 (see FIG. 10(a)) is set as the differential seconds until the end of (S2212). Next, the process proceeds to S2127.

In the process of S2127, the value of the production counter 223g is acquired (S2127), and the production type (continuous production or out of production, fluctuation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired production counter 223g value Based on, a pseudo variation pattern is selected corresponding to the effect type from the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18(b)) (S2128). Then, a display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2129). This display pseudo-fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-fluctuation pattern. After that, the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON (S2130), and the process is terminated. In the case of continuation, the pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the off pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is set by processing into the production.

Thus, in the present embodiment, by combining the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 and displaying them together with the fusion symbol, the complicated game property is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. can be done. Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced in flow speed upstream of the first ball entrance 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol is hit by the crew member 660, so that the game ball is played by the shooting device. It is configured to increase the chances of winning the first ball entrance 65a even during the period when the ball is not launched.

Further, when the special symbol deviation variation is executed, the determination result in the two retentions of the normal symbols is discriminated, and if the winning ball is stored, the period is longer than the variation ends. Since the judgment result of being out is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special pattern can be connected with the variation of the fused pattern of one variation by the success of the next normal pattern, and can be produced.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description continues. After the pseudo setting process at the time of fluctuation stop (S2120) is executed, the process of S2102 is executed. Here, when the special symbols are stopped and pseudo-variation is performed, a command indicating that the pseudo-variation is executed, and when the fusion symbols are stopped and displayed without pseudo-variation, the fusion symbols are stopped and displayed. Each command shown is set as a display stop command (S2102). After that, this process ends.

Next, return to FIG. 78 and continue the description. In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command of the general pattern (normal pattern) or special pattern (special pattern) has been received ( S1729). When it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls of normal or special is received (S1729: Yes), the command for receiving the number of reserved balls is executed (S1730). In the pending ball number command reception processing (S1730), when a command indicating the pending ball number of a normal pattern or a special pattern is received, the process of updating and storing the pending ball number and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81. A process of setting the display of each actual reserved number to be displayed by updating it to the number corresponding to the command, a process of instructing the display of the reserved pattern to be displayed in the fusion reserved number display area, etc. are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the pending pitch number command reception process (S1730) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this pending pitch command reception process (S1730).

In the pending ball number command reception process (FIG. 81, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure pending ball number command is received from the main controller 110 (S1731). When it is determined that it has not received the normal figure pending ball number command, the process of (S1733) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern reserved ball number command has been received (S1731: Yes), the number of normal pattern reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding reserved number is sent to the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223d Store (memorize) and update the value of the pending number counter 223j by adding 1 to it. Here, the reserved ball number counter 223j is a counter for displaying a reserved pattern in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and is configured to display a reserved pattern corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223j.

After executing the process of S1732, the process of S1733 is executed. In the processing of S1733, it is determined whether or not a special figure reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1733). If it is determined that the special figure pending ball number command has not been received (S1733: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure reserved ball number command has been received (S1733: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special figure (special symbol) is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding number of reserved balls is corresponded. The value is stored in the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m (S1734). It is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol reserved ball is stored (S1735). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1735: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S1735: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is on, that is, the execution of pseudo fluctuation is already set It is determined whether or not it is set (S1736). When the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1736: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S1737), and the process of S1738 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S1736: No), the process of S1738 is executed.

Here, when receiving the special figure reserved ball number command and newly stored from the state where there is no special pattern reserved ball, if the setting of the already set pseudo fluctuation is set, the setting is changed It is configured to execute the canceling process (corresponding to the process of S1737). Thereby, when the variation of the special symbols is started continuously, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pseudo variation is executed in the fusion symbol.

In the process of S1738, it is determined whether it is during the special symbol fluctuation period (S1738). When it is determined that it is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol (S1738: Yes), the value of the pending number counter 223j is a value greater than 0, that is, the pending symbol is displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6. It is determined whether or not there is a state (S1739). If it is determined that the value of the pending number counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1739: Yes), the fusion pending symbol corresponding to the special figure pending ball number counter 223m (holding displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds6 symbol) is selected based on the lottery result stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k (S1740). Here, when the lottery result of the newly entered special symbol is a hit, the reserved ball is likely to be changed to a highly anticipated reserved symbol such as red, and when it is a loss, the expected degree of blue etc. A lottery that is easily changed to a reserved symbol with a low value is executed. In addition, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the displayed reserved symbol is always changed and displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the pending number counter 223j is 0 (S1739: No), the value of the pending number counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S1741). After that, the process of S1740 is executed. When the value of the reserved number counter 223j is 0, it means that the reserved pattern is not displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, so the value of the reserved number counter 223j is set to 1 in order to newly display the reserved pattern. The color of the reserved symbol to be added and newly displayed is determined in the process of S1740. In the process of S1741, a display pending number command indicating the value of the special figure pending number counter 223m and the value of the pending number counter 223j is set. Also in the process of S1749, a display command for changing and displaying the reserved symbols is set.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description continues. In the process of S1712, when it is determined that the general pattern variation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), the process of S1731 is executed. In the processing of S1731, it is determined whether or not the normal figure or special figure winning information command is received (S1731). If it is determined that the general or special prize winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the information indicated by the received general or special prize winning information command is stored in the general or special prize winning information storage area 223a, the special prize winning information storage Each is stored in the area 223k (S1732). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one process in the main process 2 (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of this variable display setting processing 2 (S1630). The variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in the fourth embodiment is different from the variation pattern selection process (S1803) in the variation display setting process (FIG. 42, S1613) in the first embodiment. ), the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805) is different from the first embodiment in that it is changed to the normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820), the process of selecting the variation pattern of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is executed.

Next, variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1820) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the fourth embodiment, the processes from S1908 to S1911 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 43, S1802) in the first embodiment, and when the pseudo variation starts The difference is that a determination process (S1920) is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the pseudo fluctuation start determination process (S1920), which is one process in the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 83, S1820) in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of the pseudo fluctuation start determination process (S1920). In the pseudo-fluctuation start determination process (S1920), whether or not to execute the pseudo-fluctuation in the fusion symbol after the fluctuation is completed at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol is executed.

In the pseudo-fluctuation start time determination process (S1920), first, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of the special symbol of the variation is out (S1921). If it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination is a hit (S1921: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the success/failure determination result is out, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S1922). If it is determined that the value of the special figure pending ball number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S1922: Yes), the special figure variation is executed continuously and there is no need to perform the pseudo variation, so the pseudo variation Terminate this process without setting On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1922: No), the winning reservation is stored in the normal pattern 2 reservation, or the normal pattern winning prize information storage area 223a (S1923). When it is determined that a winning hold is stored in the 2 holds of normal symbols (S1923: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1924). The maximum fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set to 30 seconds (S1925). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, when it is determined that the winning hold is not stored in the 2 holds of the normal symbols (S1923: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the result of the determination of whether to start the fluctuation is out, and in the state where the reserved balls of the special symbols are not stored, it is possible to hit within the two reserves of the normal symbols. If the holding ball is stored, the process of setting the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol is executed after the end of the special figure variation time to start the variation. Therefore, even if the variation of the fused symbol that the determination result of the deviation is notified, the variation of the normal symbol that will be the next hit is completed, and the variation of the fused symbol is not fixed and stopped until the end of the period in which the winning game is executed. In addition, since the game is continued with pseudo fluctuation, the frequency of being notified of the failure can be suppressed, and the player is discouraged and the player's motivation for the game is reduced.

In this embodiment, the pseudo variation is set when there is a hit within 2 reservations of the normal design, but it may be set to 1 reservation, or may be determined and set as appropriate, such as within 4 reservations. Furthermore, when the reserved ball of the special pattern is stored, the pseudo fluctuation is not set, but the fluctuation period of the fusion pattern is set so as to be combined with the fluctuation period of the reserved special pattern. can be configured to In such a case, when the reservation of the winning special pattern is stored, the degree of expectation for winning can be increased as the fluctuation period of the fused pattern is longer by structuring it so that it is easy to synthesize.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description continues. In the process of S1804, when the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1804: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1830). In the normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), at the start of normal pattern variation, a process of selecting a fusion pattern or an auxiliary symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern (variation time) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (FIG. 82, S1630), will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of this normal pattern variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). Normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1830) in the fourth embodiment is the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 44, S1805) in the first embodiment, S2021 to S2022 each process is added They are different in that respect. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S2005, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of whether or not the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is hit (S2021). When it is determined that the result of determination of whether or not the normal pattern that starts to fluctuate is a win (S2021: Yes), an opening notice is set corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation time (S2022). This open notice is set only when the special symbol is fluctuating and hits during the period when the special symbol is being varied (including the period when the corresponding fusion symbol is pseudo-varied). The release notice set here is a notice mode for informing the player of the shooting of the game ball shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b).

By configuring in this way, when the special symbols fluctuate, the fusion symbols are scroll-displayed corresponding to the fluctuations in the special symbols, and it is configured to make it difficult to determine the result of determination of whether the normal symbols are right or wrong. However, since the notice of opening is executed 3 seconds before the winning of the normal symbol, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of missing the opportunity to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description continues. After the process of the change display setting process 2 (S1630) is executed, the process of the pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) is executed. In the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the pseudo fluctuation, and the process of executing the display setting etc. of the pseudo fluctuation is executed.

Here, the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of the pseudo fluctuation setting processing 2. FIG. The pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640) in the fourth embodiment is the first embodiment in that the processes of S2221 to S2222 are added to the pseudo fluctuation setting process (FIG. 45, S1614) in the first embodiment. is different from Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2201, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is off, that is, if the pseudo-variation is not executed in the fusion pattern (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the special figure variation outside (S2221 ). If it is determined that it is not the stop timing of the special figure variation outside (S2221: No), this process is terminated. It is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S2222). If it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value greater than 0 (S2222: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is 0 (S222: No), the process of S2207 is executed.

The processing of S2207 to S2213 has already been described in the first embodiment, but when it is determined whether or not to set a pseudo variation and the conditions for setting a pseudo variation are met, the setting of the pseudo variation is executed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol as well, and the variation corresponding to the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed in one variation in the fusion symbol. did. As a result, even if the game is complicated, the player can easily play the game by looking at the fusion symbols.

Also, when the fusion pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped and displayed, if there is a period during which the normal pattern is fluctuating until the next normal pattern fluctuation starts, the normal pattern during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Since the pseudo-variation is executed in the period until the fused pattern is stopped and started continuously at a good tempo.

Further, in the case of stop-displaying the fusion pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern, if the winning hold is stored in the two holdings of the normal symbols, the variation of the winning hold is stopped and the winning game is played. Until the end of the period during which is executed, the fusion pattern fluctuation is not fixed and stopped due to pseudo fluctuation, and when the ball enters the first entrance 64a, the fusion pattern continues until the period of the special figure fluctuation. Since the variation is executed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the fused symbol being stopped and displayed due to the notification result indicating the deviation, thereby suppressing the problem of lowering the motivation of the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to perform a pseudo-variation when the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped, but the pseudo variation is performed when the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. can be configured to

It should be noted that a pachinko machine may be obtained by combining some or all of the above embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (displays a pattern that combines normal and special patterns)
first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. provision means for providing a specific period during which the second judgment condition is likely to be satisfied when the first judgment result by the first judgment means is a specific judgment result; and the second judgment result by the second judgment means. is a specific second determination result, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first identification Display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the second determination condition is satisfied during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means and notification control means for notifying the information obtained by using the first identification information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the variation display mode of the symbols indicating the result of the second lottery is merely varied depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting hole in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are separately displayed on the display device, it may become difficult to understand the results of each lottery during the game. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may not be able to easily play the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the second determination result is also notified by the first identification information dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. By doing so, the timing at which the first determination condition is established and the result of the second determination can be known, and the game can be easily played.

In the gaming machine A1, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is displayed in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine A2 characterized by having a first display control means for displaying a part of information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the information based on the result of the first determination is displayed by the first identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to notify both the determination and the result.

The gaming machine A2 has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Machine A3.

In the game machine A2 or A3, after the specific display mode is displayed by the first identification information, if the second determination condition is not satisfied for a predetermined period even after the specific period has passed, the first identification A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the dynamic display of information is stopped.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of either the game machine A2 or A3, the effect that the first identification information is dynamically displayed for a long time and the problem that the result of the next first determination cannot be displayed can be suppressed. There is

In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, a variable ball entry means capable of being changed between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state is provided. The second determination means is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the provision means has the variable ball entry means for the first time during the specific period. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it is variable in state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first determination is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. It is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the ball into the variable ball entering means, and there is an effect that the game can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the first identification information is displayed by combining a plurality of identification pattern rows, and is displayed in at least one pattern row among the plurality of identification pattern rows. The result of the first determination is notified by information, and the result of the second determination is notified by another symbol sequence including the identification symbol sequence in which the result of the first determination is notified. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the first identification information composed of a plurality of identification pattern sequences allows the first determination result and the second determination result to be common to the symbol sequence. , and there is an effect that the number of pattern rows can be reduced and the configuration can be made easy to understand.

<Feature B group> (Structure to win according to the normal figure)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball and a first state in which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state can be changed. a variable ball entry means, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance means, and the first determination by the first determination means is a specific number A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the first judgment, a second judgment means for executing a second judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and the second judgment means. variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the second judgment by the judgment means is a specific second judgment result; and a delay means disposed on the upstream side for discharging the game ball in the direction in which the variable ball entry means is arranged after the game ball rolls for a specific period or more. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the state of the starting port is changed to the second state based on the first lottery, the game ball can reach the starting port with good timing during the second state. Otherwise, the second lottery would not have been executed. Therefore, when the starting hole is in the second state while the player does not shoot the game ball, it becomes difficult to let the game ball enter the starting hole.

According to the gaming machine B1, the game ball is discharged after rolling for a specific period or more upstream of the variable ball entry means by the delay means. Even in the first state, there is an effect that the game ball can easily enter the variable ball entering means.

The gaming machine B1 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass and detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means , a game machine B2 characterized in that the above determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the determination condition is satisfied by the game ball passing through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the rolling of the game ball. has the effect of

In the game machine B2, the delay means includes a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter, a flow speed reduction section that reduces the flow speed of the game ball that has entered the ball entry section, and a flow speed reduction section that a discharge portion for discharging the game ball to the outside of the delay means, and the ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the specific area is easily guided. Characteristic game machine B3.

A gaming machine B4 in the gaming machine B3, wherein the game ball deceleration section has at least a rolling path on which the game ball spirally rolls.

A game machine B5 in the game machine B3 or B4, wherein the game ball deceleration section has at least a mortar-shaped rolling path on which the game ball rolls in a circular shape.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, display means for displaying identification information based on the result of the second determination based on the second determination condition, and after dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means and dynamic display means for statically displaying identification information based on the result of the second determination, wherein the variable control means controls the identification based on the specific second determination result by the dynamic display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means during the specific period. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is configured with a period shorter than the dynamic display period.

In the gaming machine B6, the specific period is composed of a period obtained by subtracting a period necessary for the game ball ejected from the delay means to enter the variable ball entry means from the dynamic display period. A gaming machine B7 characterized by:

<Feature C group> (Pseudo fluctuation after special figure fluctuation according to the timing of normal figure fluctuation start)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after execution in the performance period, and when the first display means displays that the first determination is a specific result, the input of the game ball. A ball entry means for facilitating a ball, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. a second display means for displaying the result of the second determination after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, and the second display means indicates that the second determination is the specific result. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, when a specific condition is established, the end timing of the second effect period and the first effect period. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a correcting means for correcting so as to reduce the difference from the start timing of the presentation period.

According to the gaming machine C1, since the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period is corrected to be small, the first effect and the second effect are easily executed alternately. , it is possible to suppress the problem that the players get bored with the game by enjoying the mutual performance. Further, when the first determination is a specific determination result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means, so that the end timing of the first presentation period and the start timing of the second presentation period are more related, There is an effect that the production can be executed more alternately.

In the game machine C1, based on the execution of the second determination, from the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means and an overlap determining means for determining whether the first effect is executed beyond the period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the correcting means causes the first effect beyond the period by the overlap determining means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the correction is executed when it is determined that the correction is executed.

According to the game machine C2, since the correction is executed only when there is a difference from the start of execution of the first effect, there is an effect that the start timing of the first effect and the end timing of the second effect can be closer. be.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first pre-determining method for pre-determining a determination result determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is established. and when it is determined in advance that the specific determination result is determined by the first preliminary determination means, the first effect which is executed based on the first determination for the information is completed. 2 extension means for extending the performance period.

According to the gaming machine C3, since the second effect is extended until the timing when the game ball enters the ball entering means next time, the interval at which the second effect is continuously executed is shortened, and the player can start playing at an early stage. You can prevent the problem of boredom.

In either game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the duplication determination means performs the determination when the predetermined condition is established as the execution start timing of the second effect.

In the game machine C4, since the second effect period can be determined in advance in accordance with the execution start timing of the second effect, the control can be easily performed.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C4, the duplication determination means executes the determination by determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the second effect period. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, since the end timing of the second effect can be matched with the start timing of the first effect during the second effect period, when the first effect is executed after the second effect is started. There is an effect that it is possible to correct even

<Feature D group> (read ahead the judgment result of the normal pattern and execute the pseudo fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after execution in the performance period, and when the first display means displays that the first determination is a specific result, the input of the game ball. A ball entry means for facilitating a ball, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. a second display means for displaying the result of the second determination after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, and the second display means indicates that the second determination is the specific result. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when it is displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is established. Preliminary determination means for preliminarily discriminating the determination result determined by the first determination means based on the information; and variable setting means for setting.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of game machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and every time the second lottery is executed, the display device displays a variable pattern indicating the result of the second lottery. Common. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting port in the first state or in the second state, the pattern executed based on the entry of the ball is changed. There has also been proposed an attempt to improve interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the variation display mode of the symbols indicating the result of the second lottery is merely varied depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting hole in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are separately displayed on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the relationship between the first lottery and the second lottery.

According to the gaming machine D1, the determination result of the first determination is determined in advance, and the second effect period is varied. The second effect period can be varied, and there is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in a way that the player can easily understand.

The gaming machine D1 has a first effect period determining means for determining one effect period from a plurality of periods when the first determination is executed, and the variable setting means has a first effect period. The first performance is continued until at least the end of the first performance period corresponding to the determined first determination when the pre-determining means determines that the first determination results in a specific result. The game machine D2 is characterized in that the second effect period of the second effect being executed or to be executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine D2, the second effect period continues at least until the end of the first effect in which the next first determination becomes a specific determination result, so the second effect is continuously executed for the player in a short period of time. There is an effect that it becomes easy to be played and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine D1 or D2 has prohibiting means for prohibiting the second performance period from being varied by the variable setting means when the second determination is the specific determination result. Characterized game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is a specific determination result, the prohibiting means does not change the second effect period, so the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the variation of the start timing.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are at least executed by dynamically displaying common effect symbols on a display means. D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first performance and the second performance are executed by dynamically displaying the common performance symbols, so that the player can enjoy the first performance and the second performance. There is an effect that the 1st effect and the 2nd effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature E group> (Information of jackpot judgment with normal figure fluctuation and special figure fluctuation)
acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a result of the first determination when the first determination is performed by the first determination means. a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on; a ball entering means for facilitating entry of a game ball when the first determination is a specific result; and a game ball in the entering means. second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of the ball, and when the second determination by the second determination means is a specific determination result, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. and a continuous effect execution means for executing a continuous effect based on the result of the second determination that continues the first effect when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, A game machine E1 characterized by having

According to the gaming machine E1, since the results of the first determination and the second determination are executed in a continuous effect, the two determinations can be shown to the player as if they were the result of one determination. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the first effect executed based on the specific result of the first determination is continuously executed at least during the period in which the ball entering means is easy to enter. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first effect is continuously executed during the period in which the ball means is easy to enter, so the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily continue with the continuation effect that is executed when the second determination is executed.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 has display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows as the first effect, and the first effect executing means displays the plurality of symbol rows based on the result of the first determination. Of these, at least two are stopped by a combination indicating the result of the first determination, and the continuous effect executing means replaces the symbol rows other than the symbol row stopped by the first effect executing means with the second symbol row. The game machine E3 is characterized in that the game machine E3 is stopped at a combination of symbols related to the combination of symbols stopped by the first performance execution means in the previous term based on the result of determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to combine a plurality of symbols to notify the first judgment and the second judgment in order. There is an effect that the information can also be simplified and notified.

A gaming machine E4 in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is characterized in that the ball-entering means is configured such that the ball-entering is not allowed except during the period during which the ball-entering is easy.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second determination is not performed unless the first determination results in a specific determination result, so the second determination is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand the timing of

<Feature group F> (game characteristics)
first determination means for executing a determination in which a determination probability of a specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and the specific first determination by the first determination means A ball entering means for setting a period during which a game ball can be easily entered when determined as a result, and a determination as a specific second determination result when a game ball enters the ball entering means. A second determination means for executing determination with a probability set to the second probability, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines the specific second determination result. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a privilege game executing means.

According to the gaming machine F1, the probability of executing the privilege game can be set by combining the first determination probability and the second determination probability, so there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine F1, when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, a region in which the game ball can be entered and a region in which the game ball can enter and a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Game machine F2 to play.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, even if it is not determined as a specific second determination result, the game ball can pass through the specific area by obtaining a special second determination result. Since the player is provided with an opportunity to become a player, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine F3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F2, the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the frequency of determination as a special second determination result increases, and the player is made to execute a game that causes the ball to enter the specific area, thereby reducing boredom. can be prevented.

A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball entering the region can pass through the specific region and a second state in which the passage is more difficult than in the first state in the gaming machine F2 or F3. and variable control means for varying the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to change between a state in which it is possible to pass through the specific area and a state in which it is difficult to pass, so that when the game ball passes through the area, the rate at which the game ball passes through the specific area can be changed. It has the advantage of being controllable.

The game machine F4 has timing determination means for determining a timing at which a game ball can enter the area based on the determination as the special second determination result by the second determination means, The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is established at a predetermined timing based on the special second determination result.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area according to the timing determined by the timing determining means, so that the game ball can be easily moved to the specific area. There is an effect that the ratio of passing through can be controlled.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided on a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional type game machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start prize winning to the starting port, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, attention is paid to both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment, and a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied when the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result. granting means for granting; and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, Display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the establishment of the first judgment condition, and when the second judgment condition is established during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and notification control means for notifying information based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means using the first identification information.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the first identification information is a predetermined period when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result. It has a first display control means for displaying a part of the first identification information in a specific display mode based on the lapse of time.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and The period is the first period.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, first determination means for executing a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition, and based on the satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition , second determination means for executing a second determination; and provision means for providing a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied when the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result. and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, wherein the first determination condition display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the establishment of, and when the second determination condition is satisfied during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the second determination and notification control means for notifying information based on the result of the second determination by means using the first identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is displayed in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. It has a first display control means for displaying the part. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First ball entrance (ball entry means)
81 third pattern display device (display means)
203b storage means
S304 second determination means
S512 first determination means
S606 acquisition means
S607 prior first determination means
S1004 privilege game executing means
Part of S2209 variable means

Claims (3)

a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition;
a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition;
Giving means for giving a specific period during which the second judgment condition is likely to be satisfied when the first judgment result by the first judging means is a specific judgment result;
A gaming machine comprising privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result,
display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the establishment of the first determination condition;
When the second determination condition is satisfied during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, information based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means is notified by the first identification information. and a notification control means. When the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information displays part of the first identification information in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. 2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising first display control means for displaying. a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination;
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein said predetermined period is said first period.

Images